JP7102373B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to perform an effect using various effect means such as an image display means, an audio output means, a lamp, and a movable body. In many effects, the display effect by the image display means is the main, and the sound effect, the lamp effect, the movable body effect, and the like are executed in synchronization with the display effect (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-01584

The player during the game does not always pay close attention to the display effect performed by the image display means. It may be separated. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, the player may not notice the remarkable production and may overlook it, or even if the player notices it, the climax of the production may have already passed, and the production effect is fully exhibited. It's hard to say.
The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of attracting a player to a specific effect even when the player is looking away from the display effect. With the goal.

The present invention comprises a symbol display means capable of variablely displaying a symbol, and is capable of performing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop symbol after the change by the symbol display means becomes a specific mode. The specific notice can be executed during the variable display of the symbol, and the specific notice does not yet suggest the possibility of the specific mode, and the latter half suggests the possibility of the specific mode after the first half section. There is a section, and when the specific notice is executed, a voice output means capable of outputting a voice related to the specific notice and a vibration sound can be generated by vibrating a predetermined portion when the specific notice is executed. It has a vibration sound generating means, and is provided with a volume setting means capable of setting the volume by the voice output means between the maximum volume and the minimum volume, and the voice output means is used when executing the first half section. When the voice related to the specific notice is output at the first volume and the latter half section is executed, the voice related to the specific notice is output at the second volume higher than the first volume, and after the execution of the first half section, the said By the time the latter half section is executed, the voice related to the specific notice is output at a third volume smaller than the first volume, and the vibration sound generating means outputs the voice related to the specific notice at the second volume. The vibration sound is generated in parallel with the voice, and the voice related to the specific notice is easy to hear with respect to the vibration sound when the maximum volume is set, and when the minimum volume is set. Is configured to be difficult to hear with respect to the vibration sound .

According to the present invention, it is possible to draw the player attention to a specific effect even when the player is looking away from the display effect.

It is an overall front view of the pachinko machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the glass door of the pachinko machine. It is a top view which shows the staging button, the cross operation means, the volume adjustment operation means, the light amount adjustment operation means, etc. of the pachinko machine. It is a front sectional view of the operation effect means of the pachinko machine and its vicinity. It is a side sectional view of the operation effect means of the pachinko machine and the vicinity thereof. It is a front sectional view which shows the state which the effect button of the pachinko machine is pressed. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game information display means of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the board movable body of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the connection relationship between the LED common port and the LED data port of the pachinko machine, a game information display means, and a performance information display means (setting display means, performance display means). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the transition branch determination pattern by the door opening signal, the RAM clear switch signal, and the setting key switch signal of the pachinko machine, and the transition branch destination. It is a figure which shows the flowchart (first half) of the power-on process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart (the latter half) of the power-on process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting change process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power supply abnormality check process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit determination process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table (setting 6 steps) of the pachinko machine, and the contents of the 1st to 3rd information in it. It is a figure which shows the distribution of the determination value which concerns on the jackpot determination of the pachinko machine, (a) shows the case of setting 1, and (b) shows the case of setting 6. It is a figure which shows the big hit determination table (setting 1 step) of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the LED management process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the LED common output selection table of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the processing outside the use area of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the LED update process outside the use area of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume adjustment notification image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the light amount adjustment notification image of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed by the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the reset condition and the reset process of the volume level of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the image effect and the sound effect in the hold change notice of the pachinko machine. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the history of the volume of the sound effect shown in FIG. 33 separately for the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 1st volume LP1 (dB) and the 2nd volume LP2 (dB), and the synthetic volume LP (dB) obtained by synthesizing them. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the image effect and the sound effect in the normal fluctuation (during the probability change state) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a part of the history of the volume of the sound effect shown in FIG. 36 separately for the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (1/2) of the image effect and the sound effect in the normal fluctuation (during a normal game state) of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (2/2) of an image effect and a sound effect in a normal fluctuation (during a normal game state) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a part of the history of the volume of the sound effect shown in FIG. 38 divided into a normal sound effect and a specific sound effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (1/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (low reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (2/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (low reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (3/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (low reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (4/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (low reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (5/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (low reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the part of 42s to 61s in the history of the volume of the sound effect shown in FIG. 41 divided into a normal sound effect and a specific sound effect. It is a figure which shows the part of 92s to 96s in the history of the volume of the sound effect shown in FIG. 43 separately for a normal sound effect and a specific sound effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (1/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (high reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (2/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (high reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (3/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (high reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (4/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (high reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow (5/5) of the image effect and the sound effect in the reach effect (high reliability) of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the part of 42s to 61s in the history of the volume of the sound effect shown in FIG. 46 divided into a normal sound effect and a specific sound effect. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed by the pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed the history of the volume in the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect when the hall set value is set to T7 in the pachinko machine for each volume level. It is a figure which showed the history of the volume in the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect when the hall set value is set to T3 in the pachinko machine for each volume level. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed by the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed by the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed by the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the volume adjustment notification image of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed by the pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed the history of the volume in the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect when the hall set value is set to T7 in the pachinko machine for each volume level. It is a figure which showed the history of the volume in the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect when the hall set value is set to T3 in the pachinko machine for each volume level. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed by the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the tenth embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the twelfth embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the pachinko machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment of this invention. The volume level setting table (a) relating to the game volume of the pachinko machine according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention, the first to third examples (b) to (d) of the volume level setting table relating to the error volume, for the specific notification sound. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. The volume level setting table (a) relating to the game volume of the pachinko machine according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention, the first to third examples (b) to (d) of the volume level setting table relating to the error volume, for the specific notification sound. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. The volume level setting table (a) relating to the game volume of the pachinko machine according to the 16th embodiment of the present invention, the first to third examples (b) to (d) of the volume level setting table relating to the error volume, for the specific notification sound. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. The volume level setting table (a) relating to the game volume of the pachinko machine according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention, the first to third examples (b) to (d) of the volume level setting table relating to the error volume, for the specific notification sound. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. The volume level setting table (a) relating to the game volume of the pachinko machine according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention, the first to third examples (b) to (d) of the volume level setting table relating to the error volume, for the specific notification sound. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. The volume level setting table (a) relating to the game volume of the pachinko machine according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention, the first to third examples (b) to (d) of the volume level setting table relating to the error volume, for the specific notification sound. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit determination process of the pachinko machine which concerns on 20th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big hit determination table (setting 6 steps) of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the big hit determination table (setting 1 step) of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various matters before and after the effect which steals the eyes during one design change.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 to 48-1 exemplify the first embodiment in which the present invention is adopted for a pachinko machine. In FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine main body 1 includes an outer frame 2 and a front frame 3 arranged on the front side of the outer frame 2. The front frame 3 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 via a vertical first hinge 4 arranged on one end side in the left-right direction, for example, on the left end side, and is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and detachable. The outer frame 2 can be locked in a closed state by the locking means 5 provided on the opposite side, for example, the right end side.

The front frame 3 includes a middle frame 6 and a glass door 7 arranged on the front side of the middle frame 6. The glass door 7 is pivotally attached to the middle frame 6 via a second hinge 8 in the vertical direction arranged on one end side in the left-right direction, for example, the left end side, and is pivotally attached to the middle frame 6 by the locking means 5. It can be locked in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 2c and 2d. For example, a front cover member 9 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front lower portion of the outer frame 2 so as to connect the front lower portions of the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b along the front edge of the lower horizontal frame member 2d. There is. The front cover member 9 projects to the front side of the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b, and the middle frame 6 is arranged on the upper side thereof. Further, in the outer frame 2, for example, the outer frame upper hinge metal fitting 11 constituting the first hinge 4 is arranged in the upper left portion, and the outer frame lower hinge metal fitting 12 is also arranged in the upper left side of the front cover member 9 in the lower left portion.

The middle frame 6 is made of synthetic resin, and has a rectangular frame portion 13 that can substantially contact the front edge side of the outer frame 2 on the upper side of the front cover member 9, and a game board provided on the upper side in the frame portion 13. The mounting portion 14 and the lower mounting portion 15 provided on the lower side in the frame portion 13 are integrally provided, for example. A game board 16 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting portion 14, for example, from the front side, and a launching means 17, a lower speaker 18, and the like are arranged on the lower mounting portion 15 on the front side thereof. Further, in the middle frame 6, the main body frame upper hinge metal fittings 19 constituting the first hinge 4 and the main body frame upper hinge metal fittings 20 constituting the second hinge 8 are, for example, in the upper left portion, and the first, second hinges 4, 8 are provided. The hinge metal fittings 21 under the main body frame constituting the above are arranged, for example, in the lower left.

The glass door 7 includes a resin door base 22 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the middle frame 6. In the door base 22, window holes 24a of the glass window 24 are formed corresponding to the front side of the game area 23 formed in the game board 16, and a plurality of window holes 24a (here, four) are formed around the window holes 24a, for example. Various effect means such as the upper speaker 25, the frame first movable body 26, the frame second movable body 27, and the blowing means 28 are arranged.

On the upper front side of the door base 22, a side unit 30 is attached to at least a part of the outer circumference of the window hole 24a, for example, a substantially L-shaped part corresponding to the upper side and the right side of the window hole 24a, and the other part. For example, the upper decorative cover 31 is attached to the left side of the window hole 24a. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, for example, the side unit 30 holds the fixing screw 30a, the fixing lever 30b, etc. on the back side of the front frame 3 with the front frame 3 open without using a special tool. It can be easily attached and detached by operating it. Normally, the front frame 3 is commonly used by a plurality of models, and by mounting a game board 16 different for each model on the front frame 3, the playability and design peculiar to the model are realized. In the machine, a part of the front side of the front frame 3 is a side unit 30 that can be easily attached and detached as compared with other parts, and this side unit 30 has a design and unique functions that have a sense of unity with the game board 16. By making it possible, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design and function for each model while making most of the front frame 3 common.

The side unit 30 of the present embodiment is equipped with a frame first movable body 26, a frame second movable body 27, a blowing means 28, and the like. The frame first movable body 26 can slide and move in a substantially front-rear direction by driving a driving means (not shown). The frame second movable body 27 can be slid and moved substantially in the front-rear direction by driving a driving means (not shown), and can be pushed by the player. The blowing means 28 can send wind toward the player's hand at the timing when the player operates the frame second movable body 27.

On the lower front side of the door base 22, the upper plate 33, which stores the game balls discharged from the payout means 32 arranged on the rear side of the middle frame 6 and supplies them to the launching means 17, and the upper plate 33 are full. A lower plate 34 for storing surplus balls and the like, a launch handle 35 for operating the launching means 17, and the like are arranged, and a lower decorative cover 36 that substantially covers the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, etc. from the front side is attached. Has been done. The lower decorative cover 36 is formed, for example, in a forward-facing bulge shape, and for example, on the upper side thereof, operation means such as an operation effect means 37, a cross operation means 38, a volume control means 39, and a light amount control means 40 are provided. (Fig. 4).

The operation effect means 37 is used for a notice effect during a symbol change and other effects, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, a vertical movement type effect button 41 that can be pressed and operated by the player and a vertical movement type effect button 41 thereof. A movable staging means 42 arranged inside the staging button 41 and a vibration generating means 43 for vibrating the staging button 41 are provided, and are arranged in the lower decorative cover 36.

The movable effect means 42 includes a rotating body 44 formed in a substantially spherical shape, a shaft member 45 in the left-right direction that rotatably supports the rotating body 44, a light emitting substrate 46 arranged in the rotating body 44, and a rotating body. It includes a rotation driving means 47 that rotationally drives the 44, and a support frame 48 that supports the shaft members 45, the rotation driving means 47, and the like.

The rotating body 44 is formed in a hollow shape by a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and is rotatably supported by a shaft member 45 via cylindrical rotating shafts 49a and 49b fixed on both left and right sides thereof. The shaft member 45 penetrates the inside of the rotating body 44 to the left and right, and the light emitting substrate 46 is fixed to a substantially central portion thereof. The light emitting substrate 46 is for illuminating the rotating body 44 from the inside, and for example, a plurality of LEDs 50 are arranged on the upper surface side thereof.

The support frame 48 is formed in a substantially U-shape in front view by a pair of left and right vertical frames 48a and 48b and a horizontal frame 48c connecting the lower ends of the vertical frames 48a and 48b to the left and right. The left and right ends of the shaft member 45 are detachably fixed to the upper side of the frames 48a and 48b. A rotary drive means 47 including a stepping motor or the like is fixed to either one of the vertical frames 48a and 48b (here, the vertical frame 48b on the right side) in a state where the drive shaft 47a is projected inward. Further, a driven gear 51 is provided on either one of the left and right rotary shafts 49a and 49b (here, the right rotary shaft 49b), and the driven gear 51 is used on the drive shaft 47a of the rotary drive means 47. The mounted drive gear 52 is engaged. As a result, when the rotary driving means 47 operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating body 44 via the driving gear 52 and the driven gear 51, and the rotating body 44 rotates around the axis in the left-right direction. do.

The support frame 48 is supported by the door base 22 via, for example, an effect button base 53 fixed to the lower side thereof. The effect button base 53 is made of sheet metal, for example, and has a rectangular mounting plate 54 arranged substantially horizontally along the lower surface side of the horizontal frame 48c, and extends downward from both left and right edges of the mounting plate 54. A pair of left and right connecting plates 55a, 55b, base plates 56a, 56b extending outward in the left-right direction from the lower edges of the left and right connecting plates 55a, 55b, and extending downward from, for example, the trailing edge side of the mounting plate 54. For example, the support plate 57 provided is integrally provided, the mounting plate 54 is fixed to the horizontal frame 48c, and the support plate 57 is fixed to the fixing member 58 mounted on the front side of the door base 22, for example.

The effect button 41 constitutes a cover body that covers the internal movable effect means 42, and is made of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and has a substantially cylindrical body portion 61 arranged in the vertical direction and the effect button 41. It is integrally provided with a substantially spherical operating portion 62 formed so as to substantially close the upper end side of the body portion 61. The body portion 61 is provided with notches 64a and 64b formed upward from the lower end side on the left and right side surfaces thereof. The effect button 41 is mounted from above so as to cover the movable effect means 42 while loosely fitting the rotation shafts 49a and 49b into the left and right notches 64a and 64b, and the operation unit 62 on the upper side thereof is under-decorated. It is exposed upward from the button hole 65 formed in the cover 36.

At the lower end of the effect button 41, a substantially circular elevating plate 66 arranged substantially horizontally between the horizontal frame 48c and the base plates 56a and 56b is detachably fixed. An insertion hole 67 is formed in the elevating plate 66 substantially in the center, and the upper side of the effect button base 53 is vertically inserted into the insertion hole 67.

A total of four guide pins 68 are projected downward on the elevating plate 66, for example, two on the left and right on the left and right, for a total of four guide pins 68. The guide pins 68 are for guiding the effect button 41 in the vertical direction, and are inserted downward into the guide holes 69 formed in the base plates 56a and 56b. Further, a coil spring 70 is attached to each guide pin 68. The coil spring 70 has a diameter larger than that of the guide hole 69 and is arranged between the elevating plate 66 and the base plates 56a and 56b, so that the elevating plate 66, that is, the effect button 41 faces upward with respect to the base plates 56a and 56b. Is elastically urged.

The effect button 41 is held at an upper non-operation position (shown by a solid line in FIGS. 5 and 6 and a two-dot chain line in FIG. 7) by restricting the upward movement of the elevating plate 66 by the horizontal frame 48c. A plurality of cushioning members 71 made of an elastic material such as silicon rubber are arranged between the horizontal frame 48c and the elevating plate 66, and the elevating plate 66 elastically urged upward by the coil spring 70 has the cushioning member 71. The upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface side of the horizontal frame 48c via the horizontal frame 48c. The cushioning member 71 may be attached to either the horizontal frame 48c or the elevating plate 66.

A vibration generating means 43 is mounted on the lower side of the effect button base 53. The vibration generating means 43 includes a vibration device 72 and a vibration base 73 that vibrates by the operation of the vibration device 72, and the vibration base 73 is an effect button base via a cushion member 74 made of an elastic material such as silicon rubber. It is attached to the base plates 56a and 56b of 53. The vibration base 73 is provided with a plurality of guide pin insertion holes 75, and the guide pins 68 are inserted downward into the guide pin insertion holes 75, respectively.

The vibrating device 72 is composed of a motor in which the eccentric weight 72a is mounted on the drive shaft, and the eccentric weight 72a is oriented toward the front side so that the position of the eccentric weight 72a does not match the position of the center of gravity of the vibration base 73. It is detachably fixed to the center of the lower surface side of the vibration base 73. By operating the vibration device 72, the vibration base 73 supported via the cushion member 74 vibrates with respect to the effect button base 53, and the vibration causes the guide pin 68 inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 75. It is transmitted to the effect button 41 via.

By the way, the effect of the movable body has an aspect of a movable effect that appeals to the player's visual or tactile sense by the movement of the movable body, and an aspect of a sound effect that also appeals to the player's hearing. Of course, there are also movable bodies in which no sound effect is substantially generated, such as when the operating sound of the movable body is extremely quiet or when there is no sound.

Of the two movable bodies (rotating body 44, effect button 41) possessed by the operation effect means 37, the player can visually recognize the rotation operation of the rotating body 44 that is rotated by the drive of the rotation drive means 47. In addition to being able to perform (movable production), it is possible to visually recognize operating sounds such as "gacha-gacha" driven by the rotation driving means 47 (sound production). Further, regarding the effect button 41 that vibrates by driving the vibration device 72, the player can recognize the vibration of the effect button 41 by the tactile sense of the hand (movable effect), and the operation sound (vibration sound) generated by the vibration. ) Can be recognized by hearing (sound production).

Here, among the movable effect and the sound effect related to the operation of the effect button 41, the movable effect that appeals to the player's sense of touch cannot be established unless the player touches the effect button 41, but the sound that appeals to the player's hearing. The effect is established regardless of whether or not the player is touching the effect button 41. However, regarding the sound effect, the volume of the generated operation sound (vibration sound) changes depending on whether or not the player is touching the effect button 41 and further, whether or not the player is pressing the effect button 41.

That is, when the player operates the vibrating device 72 without touching the effect button 41, the operating sound is (1) the operating sound of the vibrating device 72, and (2) between the vibration base 73 and the guide pin 68. (3) Contact sound between the elevating plate 66 and the horizontal frame 48c (via the cushioning member 71), (4) Contact sound of other joint portions (play), and the like. On the other hand, when the vibration device 72 is operated while the player is touching the effect button 41, the operation sound of (1) is the same as when the player is not touching the effect button 41, but the game is played. Since the user's hand serves as a cushioning material, the driving of the effect button (predetermined part) 41 by the vibration device (driving means) 72 is restricted, and the vibration of the effect button 41 is suppressed, the contact sounds of (2) to (4) are suppressed. Is smaller than when the player is not touching the effect button 41, and the operation sound is smaller as a whole. Further, when the vibration device 72 is operated while the player is not only touching the effect button 41 but also pressing the effect button 41, the elevating plate 66 of the effect button 41 is the horizontal frame 48c as shown in FIG. Since the contact sound of at least (3) is not generated, the operating sound is further reduced. As described above, the volume of the vibration sound of the effect button 41 (volume of the specific sound effect) becomes the maximum volume when the player does not touch the effect button 41 (when the specific volume change operation is not performed).

As shown in FIG. 4, the cross-shaped operating means 38 includes four operation keys 38a to 38d up / down / left / right, and is used in situations where operations such as moving the cursor up / down / left / right are required, such as when selecting a menu item. .. The volume control means (B operation means, first operation means) 39 is used for volume adjustment by the player, and includes a plus key 39a and a minus key 39b as shown in FIG. 4, and the player can use them. By operating the two operation keys 39a and 39b, the player setting value (B value) related to the volume can be set in a plurality of stages, for example, one of five stages of M1 to M5. The light amount operating means 40 is used for adjusting the light amount by the player, and has a plus key 40a and a minus key 40b as shown in FIG. 4, and the player operates the two operation keys 40a and 40b. This makes it possible to set the light intensity level to a plurality of stages, for example, 1 to 3.

In the present embodiment, the volume control means 39 dedicated to volume adjustment and the light amount control means 40 dedicated to light volume adjustment are provided, but without providing them, a general-purpose operating means such as the cross control means 38 can be used for volume control and light intensity. It may also be used for adjustment.

As shown in FIG. 2, a glass unit 80 that substantially closes the window hole 24a from the rear side is detachably mounted on the back side of the door base 22, and is attached to the edges on the first, second hinges, and 8 sides. The vertical hinge end side reinforcing sheet metal 81a arranged along the vertical direction, the vertical opening / closing end side reinforcing sheet metal 81b arranged along the opening / closing end side edge, and the left and right arranged below the window hole 24a. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 81c in the direction is detachably fixed by screwing or the like. Further, on the door base 22, the hinge metal fittings 82a on the glass door constituting the second hinge 8 are arranged, for example, in the upper left portion, and the hinge metal fittings 82b below the glass door are arranged in the lower left portion, for example.

Further, for example, a ball feed unit 83a, a lower plate guide unit 83b, and the like are mounted on the back side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 81c. The ball feeding unit 83a is for supplying the game balls in the upper plate 33 one by one to the launching means 17, and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 17. The lower plate guide unit 83b guides the surplus ball when the upper plate 33 is full and the foul ball that has returned without reaching the game area 23 even though it was launched by the launching means 17 to the lower plate 34. For example, it is arranged adjacent to the ball feed unit 83a on the first, second hinges, 4 and 8 sides thereof.

Further, for example, on the upper side of the middle frame 6, a door opening switch 84 that can detect whether or not the front frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 is provided. The door opening switch 84 is configured to be turned on when the front frame 3 is opened to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 and turned off when the front frame 3 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 8, the game board 16 includes a base plate 85 such as a veneer plate, and a guide rail 86 for guiding a game ball launched from the launching means 17 is arranged in an annular shape on the front side of the base plate 85. At the same time, in the game area 23 inside the guide rail 86, a large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged in addition to unit parts such as a central display frame unit 87, a start winning unit 88, and a normal winning unit 89. The game information display means 90 is arranged, for example, on the lower side outside the region 23. Of course, the game information display means 90 may be arranged in the game area 23.

As shown in FIG. 9, the game information display means 90 includes, for example, four LED groups composed of eight LEDs 100, and a total of 32 LEDs 100 are the normal symbol display means 91 and the normal hold number display means. 92, 1st special symbol display means 93, 2nd special symbol display means 94, 1st special hold quantity display means 95, 2nd special hold quantity display means 96, variation shortening notification means 97, right-handed notification means 98 and number of rounds. A predetermined number is assigned to the notification means 99. That is, each of the eight LEDs 100 belonging to the first and second LED groups 90a and 90b constitutes the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94, respectively, and the eight LEDs 100 belonging to the third LED group 90c are two. Each of the eight LEDs 100 belonging to the fourth LED group 90d constitutes the first special reserved quantity display means 95, the second special reserved quantity display means 96, the normal hold quantity display means 92, and the fluctuation shortening notification means 97, respectively. Two of them constitute the normal symbol display means 91, the other two constitute the right-handed notification means 98, and the remaining four constitute the round number notification means 99, respectively.

On the plurality of unit parts 87 to 89 of the game board 16, a normal symbol starting means 101, a first special symbol starting means 102, a second special symbol starting means 103, a large winning means 104, a plurality of ordinary winning means 105, and the like are placed. It is provided. Further, on the rear side of the base plate 85, in addition to the liquid crystal display means (image display means) 106, movable bodies such as a board first movable body 107, a board second movable body 108, and a board third movable body 109 are arranged. There is. Of course, the image display means is not limited to the liquid crystal display means.

The central display frame unit 87 constitutes the display frame of the liquid crystal display means 106 and the movable bodies 107 to 109, and the opening window 110 corresponding to the liquid crystal display means 106 on the rear side is formed substantially in the center of the base plate. It is detachably mounted from the front side with respect to the mounting hole (not shown) formed in the 85 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 8, the central display frame unit 87 is arranged on the outside of the mounting hole along the front surface of the base plate 85, and the front mounting plate 111 through which the game ball can pass, and the liquid crystal display means 106. Arranged between the left and right lower ends of the decorative frame 112, which is arranged in the shape of a front view gate extending from both the left and right sides to the upper side on the front side of the front and is projected forward on the inner peripheral side of the front mounting plate 111. It is equipped with a stage 113 to be used. The game ball launched by the launching means 17 and entering the upper side of the game area 23 is distributed to the left and right at the top of the decorative frame 112, and the left flow path 114a on the left side and the right flow path 114b on the right side of the central display frame unit 87. Flow down either.

The central display frame unit 87 is provided with a warp inlet 115 through which a game ball can flow in, on at least one side of the left flow path 114a side and the right flow path 114b side, for example, on the left flow path 114a side. The game ball that has flowed into the warp inlet 115 while flowing down the left flow path 114a freely rolls in the left-right direction on the stage 113, and then is provided at the center of the game area 23 in the left-right direction. It falls to the front side from any of the other parts. Further, on the upper side of the stage 113, an intrusion prevention means 117 for preventing the invasion of the game ball to the rear side due to bounce or the like is provided.

Both the first movable body 107 and the third movable board 109 are arranged in a horizontally long shape on the front side of the liquid crystal display means 106, and the left and right ends thereof are supported on the outside of the opening window 110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. It is possible to move up and down individually by the elevating drive means (not shown). The first movable body 107 of the board has an origin position (FIG. 10 (a)) on the upper side of the opening window 110 and a maximum operating position (FIG. 10 (b)) at substantially the center in the vertical direction. The lower side of the opening window 110 is the origin position (FIG. 10 (a)), and the lower front side of the opening window 110 is the maximum operating position (FIG. 10 (c)). When both the board first movable body 107 and the board third movable body 109 move to the maximum operating position, they are in a state of being vertically adjacent to each other on the center front side of the liquid crystal display means 106 (FIG. 10 (e)). ..

The board second movable body 108 is a three-dimensional model formed in a predetermined shape such as a character, is arranged on the front side of the board first movable body 107, and can move up and down integrally with the board first movable body 107. At the same time, by driving the rotation driving means (not shown), it is possible to rotate around the central axis in the front-rear direction with respect to the first movable body 107 of the board. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second movable body 108 of the board is always visible from the front side through the opening window 110. For example, when the first movable body 107 of the board is in the origin position, the second movable body 108 of the board opens. It may be retracted to the upper side of the window 110 so that at least a part of the window 110 cannot be seen from the front side.

The second movable body 108 of the board has a "swaying motion" (FIG. 10 (d)) in which a reciprocating rotation motion is performed within a predetermined angle range, and a "rotation motion" (FIG. 10 (e)) in which the panel second movable body 108 rotates 360 degrees or more. Is possible. The shaking motion can be executed regardless of the position of the first movable body 107 of the board, but the rotational motion can be executed only when the first movable body 107 of the board is in the maximum operating position, for example.

As shown in FIG. 8, the start winning unit 88 is arranged on the lower side of the central display frame unit 87, and is detachably attached to the base plate 85 from the front side. As shown in FIG. 8, the ordinary winning unit 89 is arranged on the left side of the starting winning unit 88 under the central display frame unit 87, and is detachably attached to the base plate 85 from the front side.

The normal symbol starting means 101 is for starting the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display means 91, and is composed of a passing gate or the like through which the game ball can pass, and is a passage detecting means (passing detecting means) for detecting the passage of the game ball. (Not shown). As shown in FIG. 8, the ordinary symbol starting means 101 is provided, for example, on the front side of the front mounting plate 111 in the right portion of the central display frame unit 87, and allows a game ball flowing down the right flow path 114b to pass through. ing.

The ordinary symbol display means 91 is for displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. 9, it is composed of, for example, two LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90, and the ordinary symbol starting means 101 displays a game ball. Based on the detection, after those two LEDs 100 constituting the normal symbol emit light in the normal fluctuation light emission pattern, the hit determination disorder included in the normal random number information acquired when the game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting means 101. If the numerical value matches the predetermined hit determination value, the fluctuation is stopped in the hit mode, and in other cases, the fluctuation is stopped in the off mode. It should be noted that the two LEDs 100 constituting the normal symbol can display one or more hit modes and one or more missed modes depending on the combination of their light emitting modes (for example, lighting / extinguishing), and are normally changing. As the light emission pattern, for example, a plurality of specific types (here, two types) of light emission modes are switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, 128 ms).

Further, when the ordinary symbol starting means 101 detects a game ball during the ordinary holding period including the symbol change of the ordinary symbol display means 91 and the ordinary profit state, the ordinary random number information acquired by the detection is predetermined. The maximum number of reserved pieces, for example, 4 pieces, is held and stored, and each time the normal holding period ends, one piece is consumed and the normal symbol is changed. The stored number of ordinary random number information (ordinary hold number) is notified to the player by the ordinary hold number display means 92 or the like. As shown in FIG. 9, the normal hold number display means 92 is composed of, for example, two LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90, and each of the two LEDs 100 has a light emitting mode (for example, lighting / blinking / extinguishing). Depending on the combination, it is possible to display 5 types of normal hold numbers of 0 to 4.

The first special symbol starting means 102 is for starting the symbol variation by the first special symbol display means 93, is composed of a non-opening / closing winning means having no opening / closing means, and is a game ball for detecting a winning game ball. It is equipped with a detection means (not shown). As shown in FIG. 8, the first special symbol starting means 102 is provided in, for example, the starting winning unit 88, and is arranged in an upward opening shape on the lower side corresponding to the central falling portion 116 of the stage 113, and is left. Due to the existence of a winning route from the warp inlet 115 on the flow path 114a side via the stage 113, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left flow path 114a is higher than that of the game ball flowing down the right flow path 114b. It is possible to win a prize at. When a game ball wins a prize in the first special symbol starting means 102, a predetermined number of game balls per prize is paid out as a prize ball.

The second special symbol starting means 103 is for starting the symbol variation by the second special symbol display means 94, and the game ball can be won in the open state and cannot be won (or from the open state) by the operation of the opening / closing portion 118. It is composed of an openable and closable winning means that can be changed to a closed state (which is difficult to win), and is equipped with a game ball detecting means (not shown) for detecting a winning game ball. When the symbol becomes a hit mode and a normal profit state occurs, the opening / closing portion 118 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 8, the second special symbol starting means 103 is arranged, for example, on the front mounting plate 111 on the right side of the central display frame unit 87 and on the downstream side of the normal symbol starting means 101, and is a right flow path. The game ball that has flowed down 114b can win a prize. The opening / closing portion 118 can swing around a rotation axis in the left-right direction provided on the lower side, for example, and in the closed state, the opening / closing portion 118 becomes substantially flush with the front mounting plate 111 so that the game ball can pass through the front side. In the open state, the front side of the front mounting plate 111 has an inclined shape that descends backward so that the game ball can win a prize backward. When a game ball wins a prize in the second special symbol starting means 103, a predetermined number of game balls per winning prize are paid out as prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 9, the first special symbol display means (symbol display means) 93 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90, and the first special symbol starting means 102 detects a game ball. On condition that, after those eight LEDs 100 constituting the first special symbol emit light in the light emission pattern during the special fluctuation, they are included in the first special random number information acquired at the time of detecting the game ball by the first special symbol starting means 102. When the jackpot determination random number value to be determined matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, the fluctuation is stopped in the first jackpot mode, and in other cases, the fluctuation is stopped in the first missed mode. When the stop symbol after the change of the first special symbol display means 93 becomes the first big hit mode, the first extraordinary profit state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9, the second special symbol display means (symbol display means) 94 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90, and the second special symbol starting means 103 detects the game ball. On condition that, after those eight LEDs 100 constituting the second special symbol emit light in the light emission pattern during the special fluctuation, they are included in the second special random number information acquired at the time of detecting the game ball by the second special symbol starting means 103. When the jackpot determination random number value to be determined matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, the fluctuation is stopped in the second jackpot mode, and in other cases, the fluctuation is stopped in the second missed mode. When the stop symbol after the change of the second special symbol display means 94 becomes the second big hit mode, the second special profit state occurs.

The first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 have one or a plurality of first and second jackpot modes and one or a plurality of firsts and a plurality of light emission modes (for example, lighting / extinguishing) of each of the eight LEDs 100. The second out-of-range mode can be displayed, and the light emission pattern during special fluctuation is such that, for example, a specific plurality of types (here, two types) of light emission modes are switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, 128 ms).

In addition, the first and second special symbols are started during the special holding period including the symbol change of the first special symbol display means 93, the symbol change of the second special symbol display means 94, and the first and second special profit states. When the means 102 and 103 detect the game ball, the first and second special random number information acquired by the means 102 and 103 are stored in a predetermined upper limit, for example, four each. Then, when the reserved memory on the second special symbol side is 1 or more at the end of the special reserved period, one reserved memory of the second special symbol is digested to change the second special symbol, and the first When only the reserved memory on the special symbol side is 1 or more, one reserved memory of the 1st special symbol is digested and the 1st special symbol is changed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not change, and both the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side have reserved memory. Is designed to give priority to the change of the second special symbol.

The number of stored first and second special random number information (first and second special reserved numbers) is notified to the player by the first and second special reserved number display means 95, 96, the liquid crystal display means 106, and the like. To. Here, the first and second special reserved quantity display means 95 and 96 are composed of two LEDs 100 in each of the game information display means 90 as shown in FIG. 9, and their light emitting modes (for example, lighting / blinking / extinguishing). ), It is possible to display 5 types of 1st and 2nd special reserved pieces of 0 to 4.

The large winning means 104 is an opening / closing type winning means provided with an opening / closing plate 119 that can switch between an open state in which the game ball can win and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win. It is provided on the downstream side of the second special symbol starting means 103 and on the upstream side of the first special symbol starting means 102, and flows down the right flow path 114b from the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 114a. It is possible to win a prize with a higher probability of the game ball that has been played. The first prize-winning means 104 is generated when the first and second special symbols of the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 stop in the first and second big hit modes (specific modes) after the change. , In the second special profit state, the opening / closing plate 119 opens to the front side according to any one or a plurality of types of opening patterns, and the game ball that has fallen on the opening / closing plate 119 is made to win a prize inside. When a game ball wins in the large prize-winning means 104, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls per prize. In the following description, the first special profit state and the second special profit state are collectively referred to as a "big hit game" (special game).

A plurality of types of opening patterns of the big winning means 104 in the big hit game are provided, for example, 4R, 6R, 10R and the like. Each opening pattern such as 4R, 6R, 10R and the like is configured to perform so-called rounds with balls four times, six times, and ten times, respectively. Here, in the round with balls, after the large winning means 104 is opened, when the number of winnings to the large winning means 104 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9) or a predetermined time (for example, 28 seconds) has elapsed. It is set to close the big prize means 104, and if the player hits right at the big prize means 104 on the right flow path 114b side, the maximum number of game balls can be easily won and a large number of prize balls are won. Can be acquired. In addition to the round with balls, a round with no balls may be provided, or a round without balls may be provided, in which the big winning means 104 opens for a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds). Only open patterns may be provided.

Further, on the liquid crystal display means 106, for example, the effect symbol 120 can be variablely displayed in parallel with the variable display of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94, and the first and first. It is possible to display various images such as the first and second reserved images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4, and the changing reserved image Z indicating the number of the second special reserved images.

Here, the staging symbol 120 includes a plurality of symbol sequences (here, three in the left-right direction) composed of a plurality of symbol symbols and other symbols, and each symbol constituting each of these symbol sequences is shown in FIG. As shown in the above, it is composed of a combination of a symbol body portion 120a composed of numbers such as 1 to 8 and others, and a character and other decorative portions 120b attached to the symbol body portion 120a. The staging symbol 120 can arbitrarily change the display mode such as erasing, enlarging or reducing the decorative portion 120b, and changing the display position.

For example, the staging symbol 120 starts fluctuation by vertical scrolling for each symbol row according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern substantially at the same time as the fluctuation start of the first and second special symbols, and the stop symbol on the predetermined effective line is a predetermined mode. For example, the final stop is performed substantially at the same time as the fluctuation stop of the first and second special symbols. In the effect symbol 120, for example, the case where all the stop symbols on the effective line are the same is the jackpot effect mode, and the other cases are the off effect mode, and the first and second special symbols are the first and second jackpot modes. In this case, the staging symbol 120 is in the big hit effect mode, and when the first and second special symbols are in the first and second deviating modes, the staging symbol 120 is in the deviating effect mode.

Further, regarding the first and second reserved images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4, and the changing reserved image Z, the first and first are based on the fact that the first and second special symbol starting means 102 and 103 detect the game ball. 2 When the number of special reserved images increases, one additional first and second reserved images X1 to Y1 to be displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106, and the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 are used. When the number of the first and second special reserved images decreases based on the start of new fluctuations of the first and second special symbols, for example, the pending image Z being changed is deleted, and the first and second reserved images X1 to , Y1 ~ are shifted one by one toward the front side of the queue (for example, the right side of the screen), and the extruded first and second reserved images X1 and Y1 are moved to a predetermined position, for example, to make a new fluctuation. It is designed to change to the middle hold image Z.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a back case 121 for supporting the liquid crystal display means 106 on the rear side of the game board 16 is mounted on the back side of the game board 16, and a main control is provided on the back side of the back case 121. The main board case 122 in which the board 122a is stored, the sub board case 123 in which the sub control board 123a is stored, and the like are detachably mounted.

Further, on the back side of the front frame 3, a back cover 125 that covers the back side of the game board 16 so as to be openable and closable is detachably attached, and the game ball tank 126a and the tank rail 126b are placed on the left and right sides on the upper side thereof. The payout means 32 and the payout passage 127 are attached to each of them, and when the game ball wins a prize in the winning opening such as the large winning means 104, or when there is a ball lending command from an automatic ball lending machine (not shown) The game ball in the ball tank 126a is paid out by the payout means 32 via the tank rail 126b, and the game ball is guided to the upper plate 33 through the payout passage 127. The back cover 125 is arranged so as to cover substantially the entire sub-board case 123 and a part of the upper side of the main board case 122 from the rear side.

Further, a board mounting base 128 is detachably mounted on the lower portion of the back side of the front frame 3, and a power supply board case 129 and a payout control board 130a in which the power supply board 129a is stored are mounted on the back side of the board mounting base 128. The payout board case 130 in which the is stored is detachably attached to each of the payout board cases 130. For example, the power supply board case 129 is provided with a power supply switch 138 that can be turned on / off from the outside of the power supply board case 129.

FIG. 12A is a schematic block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. In FIG. 12A, the main control board (main control means) 122a comprehensively controls the game operation, and the game information display means 90, the normal symbol starting means 101, and the first special symbol start on the game board 16. The means 102, the second special symbol starting means 103, the large winning means 104, the ordinary winning means 105, etc. are connected via, for example, a relay board (not shown), and below that, a control command from the main control board 122a is used. A payout control that controls the payout means 32 based on control commands from the sub control board (sub control means) 123a and the main control board 122a that perform effect control such as image display, sound output, illumination emission, and drive of a movable body. A substrate 130a, a launch control board 131 that controls the launch means 17 based on a launch control signal or the like from the payout control board 130a, and the like are connected.

Further, the main control board 122a is connected to operating means such as the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133, and display means such as the performance information display means 137. As shown in FIG. 11, both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 can be operated from the outside of the main board case 122, and the performance information display means 137 can be visually recognized from the outside of the main board case 122. In this state, they are mounted on the main control board 122a, respectively. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 132, the setting key switch 133, and the performance information display means 137 are all arranged at positions that are not covered by the back cover 125.

The RAM clear switch 132 is operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, and can be pressed from the outside of the main board case 122, for example, and is configured to be OFF when not operated and ON when pressed. ing. The setting key switch 133 is operated when changing the setting, and can be switched ON / OFF by inserting a dedicated setting key into the keyhole from the outside of the main board case 122 and rotating the key. It has become. In this embodiment, by operating the setting key switch 133 or the like, a plurality of setting values corresponding to the jackpot probability, that is, the probability that the first and second special symbols become the jackpot mode (probability of winning in a random number lottery) are set. It is possible to change to stages (here, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6). Details of this setting change and the like will be described later.

The performance information display means 137 constitutes the setting display means 134 and the performance display means 135, and is provided with, for example, 4-digit 7-segment display units 137a to 137d so as to be visible through a transparent main board case 122. For example, it is mounted on the main control board 122a in the main board case 122 so as to function as the setting display means 134 during the first period and as the performance display means 135 during the second period different from the first period. It has become.

The setting display means 134 displays setting information indicating a set value (here, any of settings 1 to 6) in a different display mode depending on, for example, whether or not the set value has not been finalized. Any one of "1" to "6" and "1." to "6." can be displayed on at least a part of the performance information display means 137 corresponding to the settings 1 to 6, and is confirmed during the setting change period. For example, the setting information corresponding to the previous setting value is "1" to "6" without dots, and the setting information corresponding to the fixed setting value is, for example, a dot during the predetermined period after the setting change period ends and the setting confirmation period. It is possible to display each of "1." to "6." with. Of course, whether or not the set value is before confirmation may be expressed by a difference in display mode (for example, lighting / blinking) other than the presence or absence of dots, and the setting information corresponding to the setting value before and after confirmation may be displayed in the same manner. It may be displayed in an embodiment.

In the present embodiment, of the 4-digit 7-segment display units 137a to 137d of the performance information display means 137, the 7-segment display unit 137d on the left end side of the rear view, which is closest to the front side when the front frame 3 is opened, is used. Although it is used as the setting display means 134, for example, a 7-segment display unit 137a other than the 7-segment display unit 137d may be used as the setting display unit 134, or the 7-segment display units 137c to 137d and the 7-segment display units 137b to 137d. A 7-segment display unit having two or more digits such as, etc. may be used as the setting display means 134.

The performance display means 135 displays a so-called base value on at least a part of the performance information display means 137, for example, on the 7-segment display units 137a to 137d. The base value is an example of specific information obtained based on the game performance, and is calculated by, for example, the formula of "(the number of safes in the low probability state) ÷ (the number of outs in the low probability state) x 100". The performance display means 135 of the present embodiment can switch and display four types of base values, for example, a real-time base value, a first cumulative base value, a second cumulative base value, and a third cumulative base value. .. The real-time base value is a real-time base value during the unit measurement period with the unit measurement period until the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000). The 1st to 3rd cumulative base values are the cumulative base values in the unit measurement period 1 to 3 times before, respectively. Of course, only the base value in real time may be displayed, or the cumulative base value of one type, two types, or four or more types may be displayed.

As described above, the RAM clear switch 132, the setting key switch 133, and the performance information display means 137 (setting display means 134 and performance display means 135) are all arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 and are located therein. Since it is necessary to unlock and open the front frame 3 in order to access, the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 cannot be operated by anyone other than those involved in the hall, and the performance information display means 137 ( It is also not possible to see the display contents of the setting display means 134 and the performance display means 135).

Further, in the present embodiment, the game information display means 90 and the performance information display means 137 are mainly driven and controlled by a dynamic lighting method. As shown in FIG. 13, 1-byte dynamic lighting commons C0 to C7 scan signals can be output from the LED common port of the main control board 122a, and among them, the dynamic lighting commons C0 to C3 lines are game information. The lines of the dynamic lighting commons C4 to C7 are connected to the LED groups 90a to 90d of the display means 90, respectively, to the 7-segment display units 137a to 137d of the performance information display means 137.

Further, 1-byte dynamic lighting data D10 to D17 and D20 to D27 can be output from the LED data ports 0 and 1 of the main control board 122a, respectively, and the lines of the dynamic lighting data D10 to D17 of the LED data port 0 are games. The lines of the dynamic lighting data D20 to D27 of the LED data port 1 are connected to the LED groups 90a to 90d of the information display means 90, respectively, to the 7-segment display units 137a to 137d of the performance information display means 137.

On the sub-control board 123a, various effect means to be controlled, for example, a liquid crystal display means (display means) 106, speakers (voice output means) 18, 25, a frame first movable body 26, a frame second movable body 27, and an air blower. Means 28, lighting means 136, movable effect means 42, vibration generating means 43, board first movable body 107, board second movable body 108, board third movable body 109, etc., as well as effect buttons that can be operated by the player. 41, various operating means such as a cross operating means 38, a volume controlling means 39, a light amount controlling means 40, a side unit connection detecting means 139, and the like are connected. The illumination means 136 is composed of a large number of LEDs (not shown) arranged on the front frame 3 side and the game board 16 side. Further, the side unit connection detecting means 139 detects the connection state of the side unit 30, and turns ON when the side unit 30 is appropriately mounted and connected to the front frame 3 and OFF when the side unit 30 is not. It is configured in.

Further, a volume adjusting knob (instep operating means, second operating means) 140 is connected to the sub control board 123a. The volume adjustment knob 140 is for hall personnel and the like to perform selection operations related to volume, and can be switched to a plurality of steps (here, 10 steps corresponding to the hall setting values T0 to T9, see FIGS. 28 and 31). It is composed of a rotary switch, and is mounted on the sub-control board 123a in a state where it can be operated from the outside of the sub-board case 123 as shown in FIG. In this way, the volume adjustment knob 140 is arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1, and it is necessary to unlock and open the front frame 3 in order to operate it. I can't.

The volume adjusting operation means provided on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 may be any as long as it can be switched in a plurality of stages, and may be a DIP switch or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, since the back cover 125 covers the rear side of the sub-board case 123 as shown in FIG. 11, the volume adjustment knob 140 cannot be operated unless the back cover 125 is opened. By providing the back cover 125 with a notch or an opening corresponding to the volume control knob 140, the volume control knob 140 may be operated while the back cover 125 is closed.

Subsequently, the power-on processing (FIGS. 15 and 16) executed on the main control board 122a at the time of power-on will be described. In this power-on process (FIGS. 15 and 16), interrupts are first disabled so that interrupt processes such as timer interrupts are not executed (S1), an in-region stack pointer is set (S2), and the built-in WDT (Watchdog Timer) is set. At the same time as starting (S3), the firing control signal output port is cleared (S4).

Next, the start-up waiting process (S5 to S8) of the sub-control board 123a is executed. That is, a value corresponding to the sub-board start-up waiting time (for example, 2 seconds) is set in a predetermined register (S5), and subtraction processing (S6) is performed until the value becomes 0, that is, until the sub-board start-up waiting time elapses. ) And the WDT clear process (S7) are repeatedly executed.

When the sub-board start-up waiting time has elapsed (S8: = 0), the power supply abnormality signal monitoring process (S9 to S11) that waits until the power supply abnormality signal is turned off is executed. That is, the power supply abnormality signal output from the power supply board 129a is read twice (S9), and it is determined whether or not the levels of the two power supply abnormality signals match (S10). Then, if those levels do not match (S10: No), it returns to S9, and even if they match (S10: Yes), if the power supply abnormality signal is ON (S11: Yes), it returns to S9. (S11).

When the power supply abnormality signal is turned off (S11: No), the RAM protection and prohibition area is invalidated (S12), and the initial setting of the work area (S13) is executed. Here, for example, the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared, and the initial value 01H is set in the system operation status. Further, a standby screen display command (BA08H) is transmitted to the sub control board 123a (S14). When the sub-control board 123a receives the standby screen display command (BA08H), for example, the liquid crystal display means 106 displays "Please Wait" or the like. Then, until the payout control board 130a starts normally and the power-on signal from the payout control board 130a is turned on, the watch waits while clearing the WDT (S15, S16).

Subsequently, the process proceeds to the processes of S17 to S44. The processes of S17 to S44 include "setting change" for executing the setting change process (S20) and RAM clear process (S21 to S24), and RAM clear process (S21 to S24) without executing the setting change process (S20). "RAM clear" to execute, "setting confirmation" to execute setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) and backup restoration processing (S41), backup restoration processing (S41) without executing setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) It is performed in any of five types of processing modes: "return to backup" for executing the above, and "RAM error" for executing the process of waiting for the power to be turned on again (S27 to S29).

In addition, among these five types of processing modes, for four types excluding "RAM abnormality", the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 133, the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear switch 132, and the opening of the door (front frame 3). / Selected according to the closed state combination.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, when both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are ON, "change setting" is selected in principle, the RAM clear switch 132 is ON, and the setting key switch 133 is set. When is OFF, "RAM clear" is selected, but even if both the setting key switch 133 and the RAM clear switch 132 are ON, when the door is closed, "RAM clear" is selected instead of "setting change". Is now selected. Similarly, when the RAM clear switch 132 is OFF and the setting key switch 133 is ON, "setting confirmation" is selected in principle, and when both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are OFF, "backup" is selected. "Restore" is selected, but even if the RAM clear switch 132 is OFF and the setting key switch 133 is ON, "Backup restore" is selected instead of "Setting confirmation" when the door is closed. There is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting change function is suspected to be fraudulent in the situation where the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are ON even though the door (front frame 3) is not open. Regarding "setting change" and "setting confirmation", the door is open, and when the door is closed, "RAM clear" and setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) are not executed. "Restore backup" is selected. Regarding "RAM clear" and "backup recovery" which are not related to the setting change function, only the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 is a condition, and the open / closed state of the door is not a condition.

In S17 and S18, the level data related to the signals of the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are acquired and saved in the work area (S17), and the door opening switch 84, the RAM clear switch 132, and the setting key switch 133 signals are saved. (Hereinafter referred to as a door open signal, a RAM clear switch signal, and a setting key switch signal) are acquired (S18).

Then, based on these three signals, it is determined whether or not to select "setting change" as the processing mode (S19). That is, if the door open signal, the RAM clear switch signal, and the setting key switch signal are all ON (S19: Yes), the process proceeds to the setting change process (S20) (see FIG. 14).

In the setting change process (S20), as shown in FIG. 17, first, a setting change start command (BA76H) indicating that the setting change period has started is transmitted (S51). When the sub-control board 123a receives the setting change start command (BA76H), for example, the liquid crystal display means 106 displays "setting is being changed" or the like.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (S52). This is so that if a power failure occurs during the setting change period, a backup abnormality is determined in S26 (FIG. 16) described later when the power is turned on next time. Further, 02H is set in the system operation status (S53). The initial value of the system operation status is 01H (see S13 in FIG. 15).

Subsequently, the set value data is read from the set value work area of the RAM and set as the set work value in, for example, the W register (S54). In the present embodiment, any of settings 1 to 6 can be selected as the set value, and any of 0 to 5 is set in the set value work area on the RAM depending on the set value (any of settings 1 to 6). The setting value data is stored. Therefore, if the value of the set value work area is normal, the set work value of the W register is any of 0 to 5.

Next, the set work value of the W register is compared with the set maximum value (5 in this case) (S55), and if the set work value is larger than the set maximum value (S56: Yes), the set work value of the W register is set. Is set to 0 (S57). As a result, when there is an abnormality in the set value data, 0 corresponding to the setting 1 can be forcibly set in the set work value.

Subsequently, the security signal output from the external output terminal is set to ON (S58), and the output to the LED common port is cleared (S59). Then, the display pattern data corresponding to the set work value (value of the W register) at that time is output to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13) (S60), and the 7-segment display unit 137d (setting display means 134) is displayed. Set the corresponding LED common port to ON (S61). As a result, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 137d according to the set work value (0 to 5) at that time.

Further, a 4 ms wait process (S62) for providing a waiting time of 4 ms is executed. This is to provide a waiting time of 4 ms here in order to create edge data of the RAM clear switch signal and the setting key switch signal in S64, which will be described later, and to check whether or not each signal has changed.

Subsequently, the power supply abnormality check process (S63) is executed. In this power supply abnormality check process (S63), as shown in FIG. 18, first, the power supply abnormality signal transmitted from the power supply board 129a is read twice (S71). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power supply abnormality signals read twice match (S72), and if those levels do not match (S72: No), the process returns to S71, and if they match (S72: Yes). ) Determines whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is ON (S73). If the power supply abnormality signal is not ON (normal time) (S73: No), the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (S74), and the power supply abnormality check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the power supply abnormality signal is ON (S73: Yes), the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is incremented (S75), and whether or not the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after the increment reaches, for example, 2. Is determined (S76). If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is less than 2 (S76: No), the power supply abnormality check process is terminated as it is.

If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter reaches 2 in S76 (S76: Yes), it is determined that the power supply is abnormal, and the power supply cutoff command (BA33H, BA55H) is transmitted (S77), and the setting change process is not in progress. On condition that, the backup flag is set to ON (= AA55H) (S78, S79). As a result, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process, the backup flag remains OFF (= 0000H). Whether or not the setting change process is in progress can be determined by the system operation status.

Then, the protection of the RAM is enabled and the prohibited area is invalidated (S80). As a result, writing data to the RAM is prohibited in the subsequent processing. In addition, after clearing the output ports such as the external terminal port, subport, solenoid port, LED common port, and LED data port (S81) and disabling timer interrupts (S82), the infinite loop process is repeated while clearing the WDT. Wait for the power supply voltage to drop and the CPU to enter the non-operating state (S83).

The description will be continued by returning to the setting change process of FIG. Following the power supply abnormality check process (S63), edge data of the RAM clear switch signal and the setting key switch signal is created (S64), and whether or not the setting change end condition is satisfied, that is, the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is satisfied. Is detected (S65), and if the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is not detected (S65: No), whether or not the setting change operation is performed, that is, the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is performed. Is determined (S66). As described above, in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 132 is also used for the setting change operation, and in S66, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed when the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is detected. ing.

When the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is detected in S66 (S66: Yes), the setting work value of the W register is incremented (S67) and the process shifts to S55. In S55 to S57, if the set work value after incrementing is larger than the set maximum value of 5, the set work value is updated to 0. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting work value change processing of S55 to S57 is executed every time the setting change operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 132) is performed during the setting change period, so that the setting change operation can be performed. The set work value is changed cyclically in the range of 0 to 5.

Following the processing of S55 to S57, the processing after S58 is performed. If the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is not detected in S66 (S66: No), the processing after S58 is performed. Since the processes of S58 to S64 have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted here, but by this process, the display of the setting display means 134 also changes according to the change of the setting work value.

As described above, in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 17, as long as the setting key switch 133 is ON, when the setting change operation is performed by the RAM clear switch 132, the processing of S55 to S64 is performed, and the setting change operation is performed. If not, the processes S58 to S64 are repeatedly executed. Then, when the setting key switch 133 is switched from ON to OFF and the setting change end condition is satisfied (S65: Yes), the setting change period ends and the setting work value of the W register is stored in the setting value work area. (S68). As a result, the provisional setting work value changed by the operation of the RAM clear switch 132 during the setting change period is fixed as the setting value data.

Subsequently, the setting confirmation display indicating the confirmation of the set value is performed on the 7-segment display unit 137d (setting display means 134) (S69). In this setting confirmation display, any one of "1." to "6." is displayed corresponding to the confirmed setting value data (any of 0 to 5). That is, by adding ". (Dot)" to "1" to "6" without dots that have been displayed up to that point, it is notified that the set value has been determined. For the setting confirmation display on the 7-segment display unit 137d (setting display means 134), the LED common port corresponding to the 7-segment display unit 137d is turned on, and "1." to "1." It is performed by outputting the display pattern data indicating any of "6." to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13).

Further, a setting change end command indicating that the setting change period has ended is transmitted (S70), and the setting change process is terminated. The fixed setting value data is reflected in this setting change end command, and any of the setting change end commands of BA70H to BA75H is transmitted according to the set value data.

The explanation will be continued by returning to the power-on processing of FIGS. 15 and 16. When the setting change process (S20) is completed, the process proceeds to the RAM clear process (S21 to S24). That is, first, a specific range of the work area (RAM in the area) in the area is initialized (S21), and initial values (30 seconds) are set for the RAM clear notification timer and the security signal timer, respectively (S22, S23). An initial value is set in a part of the RAM (S24).

When the above RAM clear processing (S21 to S24) is completed, the process shifts to the common processing (S42 to S44) that is commonly performed in the four types of processing modes excluding "RAM abnormality". In this common process, various command transmission processes (S42), game state notification information update process (S43), internal register initial setting process (S44), and the like are performed. In the command transmission process of S42, the initialization command (BA01H) is first transmitted, and in the case of "setting change" or "RAM clear", the RAM clear command (BA02H) or the like is transmitted, and "setting confirmation" or "backup recovery" is performed. In the case of, the first and second special hold quantity specification commands (B0xxH, B1xxH) based on the values of the first and second special hold pieces, the setting value command (F6xxH) based on the set value data, and the state designation based on the game state. Commands (FAxxH to FDxxH) and the like are transmitted.

Further, in the initial setting process (S44) of the internal register, for example, 00H is set in the system operation status and the firing control signal is set to ON. As a result, the game ball can be launched by the launching means 17.

Returning to S19 in FIG. 15, the description will be continued. If at least one of the door open signal, the RAM clear switch signal, and the setting key switch signal is not ON in S19 (S19: No), the process proceeds to the RAM abnormality determination process (S25). In this RAM abnormality determination process (S25), the set value data is acquired from the set value work area of the RAM in the area, and the set value data and the set maximum value (here, 5 corresponding to the setting 6) are compared. Then, if the set value data is larger than the set maximum value (S25: No), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the process proceeds to the power restart waiting process (S27 to S29).

If the RAM is not abnormal (S25: Yes), the process proceeds to the backup abnormality determination process (S26). In this backup abnormality determination process (S26), it is determined whether or not the backup flag is normal (ON), and if it is not normal (S26: No), it is determined that the backup is abnormal and the power is waiting to be turned on again (S27 to). Move to S29).

As described above, when the backup flag is cleared in the setting change process (FIG. 17) (S52) and a power supply error is detected in the power supply error check process (FIG. 18), the backup flag is only set when the setting change process is not in progress. Is set to ON (= AA55H), so if a power failure occurs during the setting change period, it is determined by this backup error determination process (S26) that a backup error occurs when the next power is turned on. , Power re-on wait processing (S27 to S29) is executed.

In the power restart waiting process (S27 to S29), the RAM error command (BA7FH) is first transmitted (S27). When the sub-control board 123a receives the RAM error command (BA7FH), for example, the liquid crystal display means 106 displays a message such as "RAM error, turn on the power again and determine the setting to 1."

Then, the error display (S28) on the 7-segment display unit 137d (setting display means 134) and the power supply abnormality check process (S29) are repeated infinitely, and the power supply is waited for to be turned on again. The error display of S28 is performed by turning on the LED common port corresponding to the 7-segment display unit 137d and outputting the display pattern data corresponding to "E" to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13). Will be.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a RAM abnormality or a backup abnormality, the power is forcibly turned on again by shifting to the power restart waiting state. When the power re-on wait process (S27 to S29) is executed due to a RAM error, when at least one of the door open signal, the RAM clear switch signal, and the setting key switch signal is not ON in S19 at the next power re-on. Is again determined to be a RAM error or a backup error, and power re-on wait processing (S27 to S29) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again while waiting for the power to be turned on again, the door (front frame 3) is opened and the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are both turned on to change the setting (S20). ), And it is necessary to set the set value to any value among the settings 1 to 6. Of course, in this case, even if the set value is not set to any value among the settings 1 to 6 by operating the RAM clear switch 132, if the set value is abnormal, the set work value is set to 1 in S55 to S57. Since the corresponding 0 is forcibly set, the setting key switch 133 is switched from ON to OFF without setting the setting value to any value among the settings 1 to 6 after executing the setting change process. As a result, the setting change end condition is satisfied (S65: Yes), the setting change period ends, and the set work value of the W register is stored in the set value work area, so that the RAM error state can be recovered.

Returning to S25 and S26, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in S25 and S26 that neither the RAM nor the backup is abnormal, the process proceeds to the RAM clear branch determination process (S30). This RAM clear branch determination process (S30) determines whether or not to select the "RAM clear" processing mode, and if the RAM clear switch signal is ON (S30: Yes), the "RAM clear" When the processing mode is selected, the process shifts to the RAM clear process (S21 to S24) (see FIG. 14), and if the RAM clear switch signal is not ON (S30: No), the process shifts to the setting confirmation branch determination process (S31, S32). do. The RAM clear processing (S21 to S24) has already been described.

The setting confirmation branch determination process (S31, S32) determines which processing mode to select, "setting confirmation" or "backup recovery", and acquires a door opening signal and a setting key switch signal (S31). ), If both of these signals are ON (S32: Yes), the processing mode of "setting confirmation" is selected and the process proceeds to the setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40), otherwise (S32: No). The processing mode of "backup restoration" is selected, the setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) is skipped, and the process proceeds to the backup restoration processing (S41) (see FIG. 14).

In the setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40), first, a setting value command indicating that the setting confirmation period has started is transmitted (S33). The set value data is reflected in this set value command, and any of the set value commands of BA60H to BA65H is transmitted according to the set value data. When the sub-control board 123a receives the set value command (BA6xH), for example, the liquid crystal display means 106 displays "setting is being confirmed" or the like.

Further, the initial value (30 seconds) is set in the timer for the security signal (S34), and the security signal output from the external output terminal is set to ON (S35). Here, the subtraction of the timer for the security signal is executed by the timer management process (S93) of the 4 ms timer interrupt process. That is, during the setting confirmation process, the security signal is always ON and output from the external output terminal, and even after the setting confirmation process is completed, the security signal is output from the external output terminal for 30 seconds. Then, the set value display process (S36) for displaying the set value on the 7-segment display unit 137d (setting display means 134) is executed. In this set value display process (S36), the LED common port corresponding to the 7-segment display unit 137d is turned on, and display pattern data indicating any of "1." to "6." is displayed according to the set value. This is done by outputting to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13).

Further, a 4 ms wait process (S37) for providing a waiting time of 4 ms is executed, and then a power supply abnormality check process (S38) is executed. The 4 ms wait process (S37) and the power supply abnormality check process (S38) are the same as the 4 ms wait process (S62) and the power supply abnormality check process (S63) of the setting change process (FIG. 17) described above.

Subsequently, edge data of the setting key switch signal is created (S39), and it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation end condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is detected (S40). Then, the processes of S35 to S39 are repeatedly executed until the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is detected in S40.

When the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is detected in S40 (S40: Yes), the setting confirmation period ends and the process proceeds to the backup restoration process (S41). In the backup recovery process (S41), a part of the RAM in the area, for example, a backup flag work area or an error-related work area is initialized. Then, after the backup restoration process (S41), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned common process (S42 to S44).

When the above processing of S17 to S44 is completed, the process proceeds to the main loop processing (S45 to S48). In this main loop process, a series of processes of disabling interrupts (S45), updating various random numbers (S46), executing performance display monitor processing (S47), and then permitting interrupts (S48) are repeatedly executed. do. As a result, for example, the timer interrupt process is called and executed at a cycle of 4 ms.

Here, the performance display monitor process (S47) calculates the base value to be displayed on the performance display means 135, and the unit is during the unit measurement period until the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000). The real-time base value is calculated by counting the "safe number in the low probability state" and the "out number in the low probability state" during the measurement period and dividing the former by the latter. It is necessary to always count the "safe number in the low probability state" and the "out number in the low probability state", but the process of calculating the base value based on those values is at the display timing. You can do it accordingly. In addition, when the unit measurement period ends, the real-time base value at that time becomes the new first cumulative base value, and the first and second cumulative base values up to that point become the new second and third cumulative base values, respectively. Become.

Subsequently, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) of the main control board 122a will be described. In this timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), first, the power supply abnormality check process (S91) is executed. This power supply abnormality check process (S91) is common to the power supply abnormality check process shown in FIG. 18 already described.

Following the power supply abnormality check process (S91), input management process (S92), timer management process (S93), timer interrupt random number management process (S94), error management process (S95), and prize ball management process (S96). ) Is executed.

The input management process (S92) manages the detection information by various sensors such as the game ball detecting means and the operating means provided in each winning means, and creates and stores the input data based on the detection information from the various sensors. do. Further, here, the winning means by which the game ball has won is grasped based on the input data regarding the winning detection information, and the value of the winning counter corresponding to each winning means is updated.

Further, the timer management process (S93) manages timers used for game control, and decrements the values of various timers by 1 until each becomes 0. The types of timers handled in this timer management process include the RAM clear notification timer and the security signal timer already mentioned, as well as the timer for ordinary symbols, the timer for ordinary electric accessories, the timer for special symbols, and the timer for special electric accessories. , Magnetic error notification timer, radio error notification timer, winning opening error notification timer, normal electric accessory winning valid timer, normal electric accessory operating timer for test signals, and the like.

The random number management process (S94) in the timer interrupt manages random numbers related to each symbol variation, and is a process of updating each random number counter (1 addition) and a process of changing the start value of the random number counter every cycle. And do.

The error management process (S95) manages various errors, monitors the occurrence of errors based on the input data from various sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 130a, and the like, and if an error occurs, it monitors the occurrence of the error. , Sending an error command to the sub-control board 123a, and executing other error processing.

The prize ball management process (S96) manages the prize balls, confirms the prize counter managed by the input management process (S92), and specifies the number of prize balls if there is a prize. The payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 130a. Upon receiving the payout control command, the payout control board 130a controls the payout means 32 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Following the prize ball management process (S96), the normal symbol management process (S97), the normal electric accessory management process (S98), the special symbol management process (S99), and the special electric accessory management process (S100) are executed. ..

The normal symbol management process (S97) manages the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display means 91, and based on the normal symbol starting means 101 detecting the game ball, the normal random number information such as the hit determination random number value. And the ordinary random number information is stored in the first-in, first-out storage area up to a predetermined upper limit reserved number (for example, 4), and the ordinary symbol display means 91 is in a state where variable display is possible and one or more. On condition that the ordinary random number information is stored (ordinary hold number is 1 or more), the hit judgment random number value at the beginning is taken out from the ordinary random number information queue, and the hit judgment random number value is predetermined. The hit / miss judgment (hit judgment) is performed according to whether or not it matches the hit judgment value, and the stop symbol and the fluctuation time after the change of the normal symbol are selected based on the hit judgment result, and the normal symbol is selected. The display means 91 is used to change the normal symbol.

Further, the ordinary electric accessory management process (S98) manages the ordinary profit state in which the second special symbol starting means 103 is opened, and the ordinary symbol display means 91 is based on the hit determination result of S97 being a hit. An ordinary electric accessory that drives the opening / closing portion 118 so as to change the opening / closing portion 118 of the second special symbol starting means 103 to the open state according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern when the stop symbol after the change is in the hitting mode. The solenoid control data is set for the solenoid.

The special symbol management process (S99) manages the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94, and the first and second special symbol starting means 102 and 103 Based on the detection of the game ball, the first and second special random number information consisting of the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol random number value, and other random number values are acquired, and the first and second special random number information are predetermined. The upper limit reserved number (for example, 4 each) is stored in the first-in, first-out storage area, and when the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 are in a state where variable display is possible, the second special If the number of reserved numbers is 1 or more, the second special random number information queue is used. If only the first special reserved number is 1 or more, the first special random number information queue is used. Big hit judgment Random number lottery using the random number value to judge big hit / miss (Random number lottery process regarding whether to generate the first and second special profit states (profit state) advantageous to the player) Is executed, and the stop symbol mode of the first and second special symbols, the variation pattern of the effect symbol, and the like are determined according to the jackpot determination result, and the first by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94. ， The second special symbol is changed.

Further, in the special symbol management process, the look-ahead determination process can be executed. In this look-ahead determination process, the first and second special random number information acquired when the game ball wins the first and second special symbol starting means 102 and 103 is predetermined before being subjected to the symbol variation. At the time of acquisition of the timing, for example, the first and second special random number information, the pre-reading determination is performed for the jackpot determination random number value and the like included in the first and second special random number information. The main control board 122a functions as a look-ahead determination means by executing this look-ahead determination process.

For example, when the number of first and second special reservations increases, a hold addition command according to the look-ahead determination result is transmitted to the sub-control board 123a, and when the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols is started. , Hold subtraction command, fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol is transmitted to the sub control board 123a, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern from the start of the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. When the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols is stopped after the lapse of time, a fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 123a. Further, when the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols is completed and the first and second special reserved numbers are both 0 at that time, the customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the sub control board 123a.

Here, there are two types of jackpot probabilities, low probability and high probability, and they are set to high probability during the probabilistic change state among the special gaming states described later, and to low probability otherwise. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value can be changed to 6 stages of settings 1 to 6, and the jackpot probability (low probability and high probability) changes to 6 stages according to the set value. For example, the larger the set value, the higher the jackpot probability.

Further, the variation pattern of the staging symbol 120 includes a normal variation pattern in which the reach state is not established and a loss mode, a reach loss / jackpot variation pattern in which the reach state is passed, and the reach mode is lost or the jackpot mode is established. For example, a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided. Also, regarding the reach loss / jackpot fluctuation pattern, there are various types such as normal reach loss / jackpot fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect after the reach is established ends with the normal reach effect, and super reach loss / jackpot variation pattern in which the reach effect shifts to the super reach effect after the normal reach effect. In addition, there are a plurality of types in which the fluctuation time and the production content are different for each type of each reach fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the special symbol management process, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot is selected from a plurality of types such as normal 4R and probability variation 6R based on the jackpot symbol random value and the like. A plurality of types of jackpots are provided according to, for example, the type of jackpot game (type of open pattern), the type of special gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, and the like. For example, "normal 4R" is a big hit that causes a time saving state after the end of the big hit game by the open pattern of 4R, and the staging symbol 120 is a normal big hit mode consisting of, for example, even symbols, and there is a ball, for example, during the big hit game. It is designed to perform 4 rounds of. Further, for example, "probability variation 6R" is a jackpot that causes a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game by the opening pattern of 6R, and the staging symbol 120 is a probability variation jackpot mode consisting of, for example, odd-numbered symbols. There are 6 rounds to be played.

During the time saving state, for example, the fluctuation time of the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 is switched to a shortened fluctuation time shorter than the normal fluctuation time for the first and second special symbols, and the winning probability for the normal symbol. From the normal probability to the high probability, the fluctuation time changes from the normal fluctuation time to the shortened fluctuation time, and the opening / closing pattern of the second special symbol starting means 103 in the normal profit state changes from the normal opening / closing pattern (for example, 0.2 seconds × 1 opening). It is possible to switch to a special opening / closing pattern (for example, 2 seconds x 3 times opening). The time saving state starts when the big hit game ends, and ends when, for example, the first and second special symbols fluctuate a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), or when the next big hit game occurs by then.

Further, during the probability change state, in addition to the same switching as in the time saving state, for example, the jackpot probability can be switched from a low probability to a high probability. The probability change state starts when the big hit game ends, and ends, for example, when the next big hit game occurs.

Subsequently, a specific processing procedure of the jackpot determination process in the special symbol management process (S99) will be described based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 20 and the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21 (a). In this jackpot determination process, if the acquired jackpot determination random number value is within a predetermined range defined by the jackpot determination table, the player wins. The main control board 122a functions as a determination means for determining whether or not to generate a profit state by executing this jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20), the jackpot determination random number is first acquired (S111), and the jackpot corresponding to the special symbol corresponding to which of the 1st and 2nd special symbols starts to fluctuate. Acquire the address of the determination table (S112). Here, since the jackpot probability is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if there is no small hit, or if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same small hit probability, , The jackpot determination table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. In this embodiment, a pachinko machine without a small hit is illustrated, but this big hit determination process will be described using the big hit determination table when there is a small hit shown in FIG. 21 (a).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21 (a) includes "lower limit value of jackpot determination value" (lower limit value information), "upper limit value of jackpot determination value at low probability" (upper limit value information), and "big hit determination value at high accuracy". 6 of "upper limit value of small hit judgment value" (upper limit value information), "lower limit value of small hit judgment value" (lower limit value information), "upper limit value of small hit judgment value" (upper limit value information), "upper limit value of big hit judgment random number" It is composed of the first to sixth information groups for defining the range definition information of the type. In the case of a pachinko machine without a small hit, the fourth and fifth information groups related to the small hit determination value may be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), each of these information groups has a range and a first information indicating whether or not the determination value is different for each set value (any of the settings 1 to 6). It is composed of the second information indicating the specified information and the third information indicating the values of the big hit flag (low probability / high probability) and the small hit flag.

In the first information, 01H is set when the determination value is different for each set value, and 00H is set when the determination value is not. Further, the value of the range defining information described above is set in the second information, but the number of the second information differs depending on, for example, the first information. For example, if the first information is 00H, the second information There is only one (range-defined information), and if the first information is 01H, the second information is provided for the number of types of set values (here, 6 types). Further, in the third information, one of 00H / 5AH is set for each of the low probability jackpot flag, the high probability jackpot flag, and the small hit flag.

The second information (lower limit value information) in the first information group that defines the "lower limit value of the jackpot determination value" is not the value as it is at the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value, but a value obtained by subtracting 1 from that value. ing. Similarly, the second information (lower limit value information) in the fourth information group that defines the "lower limit value of the small hit judgment value" is not the value as it is at the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, but the value obtained by subtracting 1 from that value. It is set.

FIG. 22 shows the distribution of the determination values in the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21 (a), exemplifying the case where FIG. 22 (a) is the setting 1 and the case where FIG. 22 (b) is the setting 6. ing. The only difference between the case of setting 1 and the case of setting 6 is the upper limit of the jackpot at low accuracy and the upper limit of the jackpot at high accuracy, both of which are larger in the case of setting 6 than in setting 1. ..

Following S112, the first information as to whether or not the judgment value is different for each set value is acquired from the jackpot judgment table (S113), and the address is set to the start address of the second information in which the next judgment value is stored. Change (S114). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired first information is 00H (S115), and if the first information is 00H (S115: = 0), the range definition information (second information) is acquired from the current address. However (S118), if the first information is not 00H (S115: ≠ 0), the set value data (any of 0 to 5) is acquired (S116), and the set value data is offset and the address is changed. After that (S117), the range definition information (second information) is acquired from the address (S118).

In the case of the first information group of the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21A, since the first information is 00H and the second information is only one common to all the set values, S116 and S117 are skipped. In S118, this one second information (lower limit value of jackpot determination value-1) is acquired. Further, in the case of the second information group, since the first information is 01H and the second information (upper limit value information) is provided in six types corresponding to the settings 1 to 6 (specific range regulation information), it is acquired by S116. Offset the set value data (0 to 5), for example, if setting 1, offset = 0 to acquire the first second information, and if setting 6, offset = 5 to acquire the sixth second information. (S117, S118).

When the second information (range definition information) is acquired in S118, the value of the second information is compared with the jackpot determination random number value acquired in S111 (S119, S120). Then, until it is determined in S120 that the jackpot determination random value is equal to or less than the value of the second information (S120: Yes), the above-mentioned processes S113 to S120 are sequentially executed for each information group in the jackpot determination table. ..

While repeating the processes of S113 to S120, if it is determined in S120 that the jackpot determination random value is equal to or less than the value of the second information (S120: Yes), the third information in the information group, that is, the jackpot flag at the time of low probability , Each value of the big hit flag and the small hit flag at the time of high accuracy is acquired (S121), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

When the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21A is used, for example, if the jackpot determination random number value is 9000, the jackpot determination random number value (9000) is the second information (here, 10000) in S120 for the first information group. ) It is determined that the following is true. That is, since the jackpot determination random value is smaller than the lower limit of the jackpot determination value, the jackpot determination result is out of order (see FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)). 00H is set in all of the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Further, for example, if the jackpot determination random number value is 11700 and the set value is 6 (setting 6), the jackpot determination random number value (11700) is the second information (here, setting 6) in S120 for the third information group. It is determined that the corresponding 12000) or less. That is, since the big hit judgment random value is larger than the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit value at the time of high accuracy, the big hit judgment result is the big hit at the time of high accuracy (see FIG. 22B), and at the time of high accuracy in S121. 5AH is set for the jackpot flag, and 00H is set for the jackpot flag and the small hit flag at the time of low probability.

Further, for example, if the jackpot determination random number value is 19000, it is determined that the jackpot determination random number value (19000) is equal to or less than the second information (here, 20000) in S120 for the fourth information group. That is, since the big hit judgment random value is larger than the high probability upper limit value of the big hit judgment value and smaller than the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, the big hit judgment result is out of order (FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)). (See), 00H is set in all of the low probability jackpot flag, the high probability jackpot flag, and the small hit flag in S121.

As described above, in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 21A) of the present embodiment, the specific range regulation information (upper limit value of low probability jackpot determination value, high probability jackpot determination value) among the plurality of range regulation information (Upper limit value of It is configured.

By the way, in the present embodiment, a pachinko machine whose set value can be changed to 6 stages is illustrated, but the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 20 can also be applied to a pachinko machine having only one set value. That is, in this embodiment, a program for jackpot determination processing is performed between a model in which the set value can be changed in a plurality of stages (there are multiple stages of the set value) and a model in which the set value cannot be changed (the set value is in only one stage). Can be shared.

When the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 20 is executed on a model having only one set value, the jackpot determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 23, for example. The jackpot determination table (for setting 1 step) shown in FIG. 23 is different from the jackpot determination table (for setting 6 steps) shown in FIG. 21 (a) in that the contents of the second and third information groups and the sixth information group are different. Only the point where the dummy data group is provided behind the (shaded portion in FIG. 23).

That is, in the second and third information groups of the jackpot determination table (for the first stage of setting) shown in FIG. 23, even though 01H (the determination value is different for each set value) is set in the first information, Only one second information (specific range regulation information) is set for each. In the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20) of the present embodiment, when the first information is 01H (S115: ≠ 0), the set value data (any of 0 to 5) is acquired (S116), and the set value data is used. After changing the address as an offset (S117), the second information (specific range regulation information) is acquired from that address (S118), but in the case of a pachinko machine with only one stage of setting value, it is set. Since 0 is set in the value data, the first (that is, only) second information (specific range) with offset = 0 in the iterative processing of S113 to S120 for the second and third information groups. Since the specified information) is acquired (S117, S118), it is possible to normally execute the jackpot determination process.

Further, in the jackpot determination table (for setting 1 step) shown in FIG. 23, the data size is the same as that of the jackpot determination table (for setting 6 steps) shown in FIG. A dummy data group having a data amount (2 bytes × 5 × 2) corresponding to the second information corresponding to the settings 2 to 6 omitted in the second and third information groups is provided.

Regarding the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 23, even if the first information of the second and third information groups is changed to 00H, the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20) is normally executed, and the determination result does not change. .. However, in this case, there is a problem that S116 and S117 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20) are not executed at all (there is an unused program). That is, in this case, even if it seems that the model that can change the setting value to multiple stages and the model that has only one setting value use the common jackpot judgment processing program, the setting value is only one stage. Since there are unused programs when used on a model, it cannot be said that the jackpot determination processing programs used on both models are practically the same.

Further, in the model in which the above-mentioned setting value has only one stage, the setting value data stored in the setting value work area of the RAM is only one such as 0, but the setting display means 134 (7-segment) for displaying the setting value. The display unit 137d) not only displays the setting information corresponding to the set value data, but also displays an error such as "E". As described above, since the setting display means 134 can display information other than the setting information, it is possible to confirm whether or not the setting display means 134 is operating normally.

The special electric accessory management process (S100) manages the jackpot game in which the jackpot winning means 104 is opened, and the result of the jackpot determination becomes a jackpot, and after the changes of the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94. Solenoid control for the big winning opening solenoid that drives the opening / closing plate 119 so that the opening / closing plate 119 of the big winning means 104 changes to the open state according to a predetermined opening pattern when the stop symbol becomes a big hit mode (specific mode). Data setting processing is performed. The main control board 122a functions as a profit state generating means for generating a big hit game (profit state) by executing this special electric accessory management process (S100).

Following the special electric accessory management process (S100), the right-handed notification information management process (S101) is used to perform processing necessary for performing right-handed notification and the like. The right-handed notification is to notify that the so-called right-handed hit is in the right-handed advantageous period (for example, during a big hit game and during a special gaming state), which is advantageous for the player. Of course, not only the right-handed notification but also the left-handed notification that the left-handed is advantageous for the player during the left-handed advantageous period may be executed.

Next, the LED management process (S102) is performed. This LED management process (S102) manages the light emission of the LEDs constituting the game information display means 90, the performance display means 135 (performance information display means 137), etc., and as shown in FIG. 24, first, the LED common port. And clear the LED data port (S131) and update (increment) the LED output counter (S132). Then, the common data corresponding to the value of the LED output counter is selected from the LED common output selection table (FIG. 25) (S133), and the common data is output to the LED common port (S134).

In the LED common output selection table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 13, the first common data for turning on the common C0 and the common C4 and the second common for turning on the common C1 and the common C5 are turned on. Four types of common data are set: the data, the third common data that turns on the common C2 and the common C6, and the fourth common data that turns on the common C3 and the common C7. 4 Common data is cyclically selected in that order as the LED output counter increases.

As a result, the lighting target of the game information display means 90 changes sequentially in the order of LED group 90a → 90b → 90c → 90d → 90a → ... For each interrupt (here, every 4ms), and similarly, the performance display means 135 (in this case, every 4ms). The lighting target of the performance information display means 137) changes sequentially in the order of 7-segment display unit 137a → 137b → 137c → 137d → 137a → .... As described above, in the present embodiment, the common data is output to the commons C0 to C3 for the game information display means 90 and the commons C4 to C7 for the performance display means 135 at the same time. However, regarding the performance display means 135, in this LED management process, only the common data is output, and the output of the LED data to the LED data port 1 connected to the performance display means 135 is processed outside the used area (S105). ).

Subsequently, the LED data of the game information display means 90 corresponding to the selected LED common is created (S135). That is, LED data for any of the LED groups 90a to 90d of the game information display means 90 is created corresponding to any of the commons C0 to C3 (FIG. 25). Then, the LED data is output to the selected LED data port (here, the LED data port 0 connected to the game information display means 90) (S136), and the LED management process is terminated. As a result, the four LED groups 90a to 90d of the game information display means 90 can be turned on while being sequentially switched every 4 ms.

Following the above LED management process (S102), an external terminal management process (S103) and a solenoid management process (S104) are performed. In the external terminal management process (S103), the operating state information of the pachinko machine is output to an external device such as a hall computer via the external output terminal provided on the back side of the front frame 3. Further, in the solenoid management process (S104), for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the large winning opening solenoid based on the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (S98) and the special electric accessory management process (S100). Controls the output of the excitation signal.

Subsequently, the out-of-use processing (S105) is performed. In the out-of-use area processing (S105), as shown in FIG. 26, all the registers are first saved to the stack (S141), the stack pointer during normal processing is saved (S142), and the stack for out-of-use area is saved in the stack pointer. Set the pointer address (S143).

Then, the display content of the performance display means 135 is updated by the display content update process (S144), and LED data corresponding to the four 7-segment display units 137a to 137d constituting the performance display means 135 are created. In the performance display means 135, first, an operation confirmation display in which all lighting and all extinguishing are repeated is performed for a predetermined operation confirmation time (for example, about 5 seconds), and then calculated by a performance display monitoring process (S47 in FIG. 16). A plurality of types of base values (here, four types of real-time base values and first to third cumulative base values) are displayed cyclically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4.8 seconds).

In the four 7-segment displays 137a to 137d (FIGS. 11 and 13) constituting the performance display means 135, for example, the upper two-digit 7-segment displays 137d and 137c are the types of base values (real-time base values, 1st to 13th). The identification display unit (separate from the third cumulative base value) and the like, and the lower two-digit 7-segment display units 137b and 137a are numerical display units that display the numerical values of the base value and the like.

The base value is measured for each unit measurement period until the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (60,000 in this case), but the first unit measurement period after the first power-on is at the time of power-on. Instead of starting from, it starts after the lapse of a predetermined pre-measurement period (for example, when the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (here, 300)).

During the real-time base value display period, for example, "bL." Showing the real-time base value is displayed on the identification display unit, and for example, the real-time base value at the start of the real-time base value display period or immediately before the start of the real-time base value display period is displayed on the numerical display unit. However, depending on whether or not the number of outs in the unit measurement period at that time reaches a predetermined threshold value (for example, 6000), the display mode of "bL." In the identification display unit is different between lighting and blinking, for example. It has become like. For example, the base value is displayed on the numerical display after rounding off to the first decimal place, but if the rounded value is 3 digits or more, "99." or the like indicating overflow is displayed on the numerical display. do.

Further, during the 1st to 3rd cumulative base value display period, for example, "b1." To "b3." Showing the 1st to 3rd cumulative base values are displayed on the identification display unit, and the numerical display unit thereof. The 1st to 3rd cumulative base values at the time are displayed, but if the 1st to 3rd cumulative base values have not been obtained yet, for example, "b1." To "b3." In the identification display unit are blinking. At the same time, "---" is displayed on the numerical display unit. For example, until the end of the first unit measurement period after the first power-on, none of the first to third cumulative base values have been obtained, so the performance display means during the first to third cumulative base value display periods. The display of 135 is "b1 .--" to "b3 .--".

During the pre-measurement period (the number of outs is less than 300) before the start of the first unit measurement period, "bL.", "B1." To "b3.", For example, are blinking on the identification display unit. Then, for example, "---" is lit up on the numerical display unit.

Following the display content update process (S144), the LED out-of-use area update process (S145) is performed. In this out-of-use LED update process (S145), as shown in FIG. 27, the value of the LED output counter is first acquired (S151). This LED output counter is used for selecting common data in the LED management process of FIG. 24. Then, based on the value of the LED output counter, the LED data corresponding to the 7-segment display units 137a to 137d created in the display content update process (S144) is changed to the common selected in the LED management process (FIG. 24). Select the corresponding LED data (S152).

For example, when the common C4 is turned on in the LED management process, the LED data corresponding to the 7-segment display unit 137a is selected, and when the common C7 is turned on in the LED management process, the 7-segment display unit is selected. The LED data corresponding to 137d is selected. As described above, since the common LED output counter is used for the selection of the commons C4 to C7 in the LED management process and the selection of the LED data in the LED update process outside the used area, the LED data corresponding to the selected common is used. Can be easily and surely selected, and the program capacity can be reduced.

Then, the LED data selected in S152 is output to the LED data port 1 connected to the performance display means 135 (S153), and the LED update process outside the used area is completed.

Following the above-mentioned out-of-area LED update process (S145), the out-of-area SW detection information storage process (S146) and test firing test signal update process (S147) are executed, and then the stack pointer during normal processing is restored ( S148), all the registers are returned from the stack (S149), and the out-of-use processing is terminated.

Returning to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 19, the description will be continued. When the out-of-use processing (S105) described above is completed, the WDT is cleared (S106) and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Subsequently, the control operation of the sub control board 123a will be described. The sub-control board 123a includes a liquid crystal display means 106, an electric decoration means 136, speakers 18, 25, a frame first movable body 26, a frame second movable body 27, a blowing means 28, a board first movable body 107, and a board second movable body. It controls the effect by various effect means such as the body 108 and the third movable body 109 of the board. It includes a control means 143, a normal advance notice effect control means 144, a customer waiting control means 145, a volume setting means 146, a light amount setting means 147, and the like.

The types of staging by various staging means include an image staging in which an image including a moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106 and the like, a light emitting staging by the lighting means 136 and the like, a sound staging by sound generation, a rotating body 44, and a staging. There is a movable effect by a movable body such as a button 41.

Further, the sound effect includes a normal sound effect that outputs sound from the speakers 18 and 25 based on the sound data, and a specific sound effect that generates an operation sound by driving a movable body (predetermined part) by a driving means. Here, the volume due to the normal sound effect changes with the change in the volume level due to the volume adjustment operation described later, but the volume due to the specific sound effect does not change even if the volume level changes due to the volume adjustment operation. However, regarding the volume due to the specific sound effect, if the player can touch the driven movable body, the volume of the operating sound may change depending on whether or not the player is touching the movable body. There is sex.

As described above, the sub-control board 123a receives sound from the display effect executing means capable of executing the display effect of displaying the image including the moving image on the liquid crystal display means (display means) 106 and the speakers (sound output means) 18 and 25. It constitutes a sound effect executing means capable of executing the output sound effect. The moving image displayed by the display effect is composed of, for example, connecting a plurality of scenes.

The special hold quantity display control means 141 controls the display of the first and second special hold quantity on the liquid crystal display means 106, and corresponds to the increase / decrease in the first and second special hold quantity, the first special hold. Corresponds to the number of first reserved images X1 to X4 (maximum 4), the second reserved images Y1 to Y4 for the second special reserved number (maximum 4), and the changing 1st and 2nd special symbols. The variable pending image Z is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106.

In the present embodiment, in order to preferentially digest the reserved storage of the second special symbol over the reserved storage of the first special symbol, the second special symbol side is prioritized also for the reserved display, and as shown in FIG. 8, the first The second reserved images Y1 to Y4 are partially overlapped and displayed on the front side of the reserved images X1 to X4. When the hold addition command regarding the first and second special hold numbers is received from the main control board 122a, one additional hold addition image X1 to Y1 to the first and second hold images X1 to Y1 is displayed at the end of the queue. Further, when the hold subtraction command regarding the first and second special hold numbers is received from the main control board 122a, the first and second hold images X1 to Y1 are directed toward the front side of the queue one by one. At the same time as shifting, the extruded first and second reserved images X1 and Y1 are moved to, for example, a predetermined position to be changed to the variable reserved image Z. In the present embodiment, for example, "white" is set as the default for the display color (display mode) of the first and second reserved images X1 to Y1 and the changing reserved image Z, and the pending change effect described later is executed. The look-ahead notice effect is changed according to the scenario selected by the effect control means 142.

The look-ahead notice effect control means 142 controls the look-ahead notice effect. In the look-ahead notice effect, based on the look-ahead determination result by the main control board 122a, whether or not the big hit game occurs in the first and second big hit modes of the stop symbol after the change of the first and second special symbols. Based on the look-ahead judgment result, for example, in the same mode in multiple symbol fluctuations (during the look-ahead zone) up to the symbol change (target change) corresponding to the special random number information targeted for the look-ahead judgment. There are a "continuous effect" for executing the effect, a "hold change effect" for changing (changing) the display modes of the first and second reserved images X1 to Y1 based on the pre-reading determination result, and the like.

The symbol variation effect control means 143 controls various effects related to the variation display of the effect symbol 120, that is, image effect, light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and when a variation pattern command is received from the main control board 122a. In addition, an image effect, a light emission effect, a sound effect, and a movable effect related to the variation display of the effect symbol 120 based on the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect scenario selected by the normal advance notice effect control means 144. Etc., and when the fluctuation stop command is received, the fluctuation of the effect symbol 120 is stopped by the stop symbol selected based on the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command, and the accompanying image effect, light emission effect, etc. Sound production, movable production, etc. are stopped.

The normal advance notice effect control means 144 executes the normal advance notice effect. The normal advance notice effect is to give a notice of whether or not the stop symbol after the symbol change becomes the big hit mode during the symbol change, based on the big hit determination result or the like by the big hit determination process on the main control board 122a side, for example. There are "pseudo-ren", "SU production", "timer production", "revival production", "premier production", "button production" and the like.

Here, the "pseudo-ream" is an effect in which the effect symbol 120 is changed a plurality of times by the liquid crystal display means 106 while the first and second special symbols are changed once. It is set to be highly reliable. Further, the "SU effect" is a plurality of predetermined effect steps including the display of the effect symbol 120 on the liquid crystal display means 106 during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols, for example, in a plurality of stages (for example, SU1) according to the jackpot reliability. It is an effect to be executed up to a predetermined stage among (3 stages of SU3), and for example, the jackpot reliability is set to increase as the stage of the effect step progresses. The "timer effect" is, for example, an effect of displaying a timer image on the liquid crystal display means 106 at a predetermined timing to perform time counting (for example, countdown). For example, the longer the time counting time, the higher the jackpot reliability. Has been done. In addition, the "revival effect" is an effect that revives from the state in which the offset or the like is displayed and becomes, for example, a big hit mode, and the "premier effect" is an effect in which the appearance rate is extremely low, and when it appears, for example, the probability change big hit is confirmed. Further, the "button effect" is, for example, a jackpot reliability when it is determined that the operation of the effect button 41 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (operation is established) during the operation valid period during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. A predetermined post-operation effect is executed according to the situation.

When the normal advance notice effect control means 144 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 122a, the information obtained from the fluctuation pattern command (here, the jackpot determination result and the fluctuation pattern selection result) and the set value (settings 1 to 6) are set. Based on either) and the normal advance notice effect selection table, it is selected whether or not to execute the lottery related to the normal advance notice effect (with / without lottery). When the lottery execution is selected for at least one of the plurality of normal advance notice effects, for example, the jackpot determination result, the set value (any of settings 1 to 6), and each normal advance notice effect are selected for the normal advance notice effect. Select one from multiple scenarios based on the scenario selection table for.

The customer waiting control means 145 changes the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 after the customer waiting start condition including the reception of the customer waiting command (BA04H) is satisfied. It controls the effect of the customer waiting state (during the fluctuation stop state in which the symbol is not changed) until the customer waiting end condition such as the start of is satisfied.

After the start of the customer waiting state, the pre-customer waiting production is first performed. In this pre-customer waiting effect, the liquid crystal display means 106 continues to display the image of the effect symbol 120 in a state of being stopped due to the immediately preceding symbol change, and the illumination means 136 emits light in a predetermined customer waiting light emitting mode, and the speaker 18, From 25, the predetermined BGM is continuously output.

When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the pre-customer waiting effect, the process shifts to the customer waiting effect. The image is continuously displayed, and the menu display operation notification image for notifying the operation method for displaying the menu screen, the volume adjustment operation notification image for notifying the operation method for volume adjustment, and the operation method for notifying the light amount adjustment are notified. The display of the light amount adjustment operation notification image, etc. is started. In this way, during the execution of the pre-customer waiting effect, that is, during the period from the start of the customer waiting state to, for example, 30 seconds, the menu display operation period and the volume / light amount adjustment operation period are possible. , The menu display operation notification image for notifying it, the volume adjustment operation notification image, and the light amount adjustment operation notification image are not displayed.

After that, when the demo start condition is satisfied (for example, 180 seconds have passed from the start of the customer waiting state), the customer waiting effect shifts to the demo effect. In the demo production, "model image demo" that executes the image movie of the model, "model logo" that displays the model logo image that shows the logo of the model, and "company logo" that displays the company logo image that shows the logo of the manufacturer. , "Anti-slip display", etc., which displays an image of anti-slip display, are performed in sequence.

After the start of the demonstration effect, waiting for customers for a predetermined time, for example, until the customer waiting end conditions such as the start of fluctuation of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 are satisfied. Demonstration production is repeatedly executed continuously while sandwiching the production or without sandwiching the customer waiting production.

The volume setting means (volume level setting means, volume level changing means, first volume level changing means, set volume changing means) 146 is a volume related to the sound (BGM, sound effect, notification sound, etc.) output from the speakers 18 and 25. The hall setting value (instep value) obtained by the volume adjustment knob (instep operating means, second operating means) 140 arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 for setting the level or changing the level into multiple stages. The player setting value (B value) obtained by the volume control means (B operation means, first operation means) 39 arranged on the front side of the game machine main body 1 and the volume level setting table stored in advance. Based on this, the volume level is set to one of a plurality of levels, for example, eight levels from 0 (silence) to 7 (maximum volume). The volume can be adjusted by the volume control means 39 during a predetermined volume adjustable period. The volume adjustable period can be arbitrarily set, but for example, the entire period except for a certain period when the power is turned on may be set as the volume adjustable period.

In the volume level setting table, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, the volume adjustment knob 140 has 10 levels of hole setting values of T0 to T9, and the volume control means 39 has 5 levels of player setting values of M1 to M5. The corresponding volume level assignment and the initial positions of the player set values M1 to M5 for each hole set value T0 to T9 are set. Of the hole set values T0 to T9, those involved in the hall usually select T3 to T7 for the normal mode and T8 and T9 for the power saving mode. When T8 or T9 for the power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is turned on, and when a power saving start condition such as a predetermined time elapses after the start of the customer waiting state is satisfied, the light intensity is set lower than that in the normal mode. It is controlled to emit light (may be extinguished) in the light emitting mode during power saving. When T3 to T7 for the normal mode are selected, the power saving mode is turned off.

In the volume level setting table shown in FIG. 28, the correspondence between the player set values M1 to M5 and the volume level is the same for the hall set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, and the initial positions are different. .. That is, for each of the hole set values T3 to T7, the volume levels 3 to 7 are assigned to the player set values M1 to M5, respectively, but the initial position with respect to the hole set values T3 to T7 is set by the player. The values are set to M1 to M5 (that is, volume levels 3 to 7). As described above, with respect to the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the larger the hole setting value, the higher the initial volume level.

The hall set values T8 and T9 for the power saving mode also have the same correspondence between the player set values M1 to M5 and the volume level, and the initial positions are different. That is, for all of the hole set values T3 to T7, the volume levels 3 to 7 are assigned to the player set values M1 to M5, respectively, as in the case of the hole set values T3 to T7, but the hole set values are assigned. The initial positions with respect to T8 and T9 are set to the player set values M1 and M5 (that is, volume levels 3 and 7), respectively. As described above, as for the hole setting values T8 and T9 for the power saving mode, the larger the hole setting value, the higher the initial volume level.

Of the hole set values T0 to T2 that are not normally selected in the game hall, the hole set value T0 is for making the hole silent, and the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5 are all 0 (silence). It has become. The hall set value T1 is for presentation, for example, the volume level corresponding to the player set value M1 at the minimum stage is 1, and the volume level corresponding to the other player set values M2 to M5 is the same as the hall set value T3 and the like. The initial position is set to the player set value M1 (that is, volume level 1). The hall set value T2 is for factory use, for example, the volume level corresponding to the player set value M1 at the minimum stage is 2, and the volume corresponding to the other player set values M2 to M5 is the hall set value T3 or the like. It is the same, and the initial position is set to the player set value M1 (that is, volume level 2). As described above, the initial positions in the case of the hole set values T0 to T2 are all set to the minimum player set value M1.

Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall set value at that time (here, the player set value) regardless of the player set value by the volume operating means 39. The volume level corresponding to M5) is set.

Here, the error sound is a notification sound output when a predetermined error occurs. In this embodiment, not only a normal error sound but also a specific notification sound, for example, various security notification sounds (RAM clear notification sound, backup recovery notification sound, setting changing notification sound, setting confirmation notification sound, etc.) output when the power is turned on, etc. ) Is also output at the volume level for the error sound. The same shall apply to the embodiments described later unless otherwise specified.

Further, the volume setting means 146 includes a volume adjustment notification means 146a, a reset means 146b, and the like. The volume adjustment notification means 146a is for displaying the volume adjustment notification image PV on the liquid crystal display means 106, for example, and the liquid crystal display is started during the volume adjustment notification period started when the player operates the volume control means 39. The volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed on the display means 106.

The volume adjustment notification image PV is for notifying the volume setting status by the player operation, and as shown in FIG. 29, for example, a plurality of (here, five) corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5 regarding the volume. The volume display figures 151 to 155 are provided. The volume display figures 151 to 155 are formed in a vertical band shape having a length corresponding to, for example, a player set value, and are arranged in the left-right direction with the lower end sides aligned, for example. The volume display figures 151 to 155 can be displayed in two types of display modes, for example, "white" and "solid", and are predetermined from the volume display figure 151, for example, according to the player setting value at that time. By setting the display mode of the number to "solid painting" and setting the other display mode to "white", the player setting value regarding the volume is notified. For example, in the case of the player set value M3, as shown in FIG. 29, the volume display figures 151 to 153 for the three from the left are "solid", and the other volume display figures 154 and 155 are "white". Is displayed respectively.

In this way, the volume adjustment notification image PV indicates a range of player setting values (first information) that can be selected by operating the volume operating means 39 according to the number of displayed volume display figures, and also displays the volume by "solid painting". The number of displayed figures indicates the player set value (second information) at that time. In the following description, the volume adjustment notification image PVs corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5 are distinguished as PV1 to PV5, respectively.

In the case of this embodiment, since the initial position is different for each hole set value as shown in FIG. 28, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume and volume are increased. The adjustment notification image PV changes together. For example, as shown in FIGS. 31A to 31E, the hole setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M1 (initial position), and the hole setting value is displayed while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed. When is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes sequentially in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value, and the volume is adjusted. Similarly, the broadcast image PV changes sequentially in the order of PV1 → PV2 → PV3 → PV4 → PV5 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

The reset means (second volume level changing means) 146b is for resetting the volume level, and when a predetermined reset condition is satisfied, the player set value (that is, the volume level) corresponds to the hall set value. It is designed to reset to the initial position (specific volume level). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the first and second reset conditions are provided as the reset conditions for resetting the volume level, and the first reset condition is "when the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched". , The second reset condition (predetermined condition) is "when the demo start condition is satisfied during the customer waiting state (for example, 180 seconds have passed from the start of the customer waiting state), and the player set value is smaller than the initial position". ing.

For example, (a) → (b), (b) → (c), (c) → (d), (d) → (e) in FIG. 31 show the situation when the first reset condition is satisfied. After switching the volume adjustment knob 140, the player set value (that is, the volume level) is set to the initial position corresponding to the new hole set value. Further, for example, when the hall set value is set to T5, 180 seconds have passed from the start of the customer waiting state, and the player set value at that time is smaller than M3 (specific volume level 5) which is the initial position. If it is (volume level 3) or M2 (volume level 4) (predetermined condition is satisfied), the player setting value is reset to M3 (specific volume level 5).

In this way, the reset means 146b sets the volume level so that the volume due to the normal sound effect and the volume due to the specific sound effect are in a predetermined balance, regardless of the volume adjustment operation of the player, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It constitutes a changeable second volume level changing means.

The light amount setting means 147 sets the light amount when the illumination means 136 or the like composed of various light emitting boards on the frame side or the board side emits light, and corresponds to the player setting value obtained by the light amount control means 40. Then, the light intensity level is set to any one of a plurality of stages (for example, 3 stages of 1 to 3). As described above, in the present embodiment, the light amount level is not provided with the operation means for those involved in the hall such as the volume adjustment knob 140, and can be adjusted only by the operation of the light amount control means 40. Further, the light amount level related to the light emission for error notification is, for example, always the maximum light amount level, and cannot be changed by the light amount operating means 40. The light amount can be adjusted by the light amount operating means 40 during a predetermined light amount adjustable period. The light amount adjustable period can be arbitrarily set, but for example, the entire period except for a certain period when the power is turned on may be set as the light amount adjustable period.

Further, the light amount setting means 147 includes a light amount adjustment notification means 147a. The light amount adjustment notification means 147a is for displaying the light amount adjustment notification image PL on, for example, the liquid crystal display means 106, and the liquid crystal display means during the light amount adjustment notification period including the case where the player operates the light amount operation means 40. The light amount adjustment notification image PL is displayed on 106.

As shown in FIG. 30, for example, the light amount adjustment notification image PL includes a plurality of (here, three) light amount display figures 161 to 163 corresponding to the number of steps of the light amount level. The light amount display figures 161 to 163 are formed in a vertical band shape having a length corresponding to, for example, the light amount level, and are arranged in the left-right direction with the lower end sides aligned, for example. The light amount display figures 161 to 163 can be displayed in two display modes, for example, "white outline" and "solid paint", respectively, and a predetermined number of light amount display figures 161 can be displayed according to the light amount level at that time. The light intensity level is notified by setting the display mode to "solid paint" and the other display modes to "white". For example, when the light amount level is set to 1, as shown in FIG. 30, only the first light amount display figure 161 is "solid", and the other light amount display figures 162 and 163 are "white". Is displayed.

Next, a specific example of the symbol variation effect in this pachinko machine will be described. First, a specific example of the hold change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, but before that, the aim of the hold change effect will be described.

With the spread of smartphones these days, the use of apps such as SNS, games, manga, and video sites is rapidly spreading, and many players play games with their smartphones in one hand even while playing pachinko / pachislot. It is becoming like that. For such players, the eyes are not on the board of pachinko / pachislot, but on their own smartphones, such as being distracted by the operation of the smartphone during the game, watching the played video, and playing on SNS. Often.

One of the factors that cause such an event is considered to be the game characteristics of pachinko and pachislot machines. That is, since the pachinko / pachislot is a specification in which the winning game is repeatedly performed while maintaining a predetermined probability and a predetermined output rate (output rate per predetermined time), (number of lost games (time))> (winning game). It is inevitable that the number of times (time) will be reached, and the player will inevitably spend a lot of time on the lost game. Therefore, for the player, much of the time spent on the game is, so to speak, the time for the boring lost game.

That is why pachinko / pachislot manufacturers have always considered productions and notices that will not get boring for players from various angles, and have created highly interesting productions and notices so that players can withstand repeated lost games. rice field. However, as mentioned above, recent players have come to overcome boredom by using smartphones during lost games, and they are interested in the productions and notices that the manufacturers have made efforts to think about. There is a situation where there is no such thing. In the present embodiment, as described above, in order to deliver more effective effects and notices to the players who enjoy using smartphones during the game, for example, the following points should be taken into consideration when constructing the effects and notices. I have to.

First, when considering a gimmick to change the situation where the player's interest is (smartphone)> (directing and notice) to (smartphone) <(directing and notice), spend on the lost game. In all of the time, it means that we cannot dare to create a relationship of (smartphone) <(directing and notice). If you try to establish a relationship of (smartphone) <(directing and notice) in all the time spent on the lost game, the apparent flashiness and complexity of the directing and notice will increase, and on the contrary, the important part will be the player. It leads to the fact that it does not reach (I understand that it is flashy, but the reliability and expectations are not well communicated). Also, simply, players who enjoy using smartphones are considered to be enjoying what they are particularly interested in from among the many contents, so all the productions and notices that exceed that interest are spent on lost games. It is almost impossible to execute in time, and in that respect, even if you challenge the smartphone head-on, there is no chance to win.

In consideration of these, in the present embodiment, it is selected not to dare to create a relationship of (smartphone) <(directing or notice) in all the time spent on the losing game.

In this case, the next important thing is how to change the situation from the situation where the player's interest is (smartphone)> (directing or notice) to the situation where (smartphone) <(directing or notice). Is it set to? For example, if the appearance frequency in one lost game is set high for the production and notice for the purpose of changing to (smartphone) <(production and notice), even if such a production and notice appear. As a result, the frequency of deriving the loss result increases. This is effective for first-time players, but the effect gradually diminishes for known players, and it may eventually become (smartphone)> (directing and notice). The sex becomes high. Of course, that is not a bad thing as a game machine production or notice, but the frequency of appearance in one lost game is set high, or it is configured to appear multiple times in one lost game. As a result, as described above, a configuration that is more effective only for the first-time player or a notice may be adopted.

However, in order to make it more effective not only for first-time players but also for known players, it is a production aimed at changing interests to (smartphone) <(production and notice). It is desirable to set the frequency of appearance in one lost game of or notice to be low. That is, by setting the frequency of appearance of such effects and notices low, the purpose is to change the player's interest from (smartphone)> (directed or notice) to (smartphone) <(directed or notice). Since it is possible to set a high degree of reliability for the production and advance notice (the reliability at the time of appearance is relatively high as the appearance rate in the lost game decreases), the frequency with which the hit result is derived when it appears is determined. Can be set high. This makes it possible to change the target of the player's interest from (smartphone)> (directing or notice) to (smartphone) <(directing or notice) regardless of whether it is first seen or known.

And, most importantly, the direction and notice for changing the player's interest to (smartphone) <(effect and notice) are as shown in FIG. 33 as shown below. It can be a more effective production or notice.

The hold change effect shown in FIG. 33 is executed during the reach change during the normal gaming state, before the reach change, and the like, and is held during change to suggest that the effect symbol 120 may become a big hit mode due to the change. Change the display color of image Z from the default white (normal hold) to red (red hold) (the order of colors indicating the degree of expectation includes blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc., among them relatively It is designed to change to a color (here, red or higher) that shows relatively high reliability rather than low reliability (blue, green here). Regarding the hold change effect, first, the image effect will be described. At the start of the hold change effect, the screen of the liquid crystal display means 106 is toned down (visibility is suppressed), and an image showing an “arrow” appears ( FIG. 33 (a)), the pre-holding change effect for producing the hold change is started. At this time, on the screen of the liquid crystal display means 106, in addition to the image of the "arrow" related to the effect before the hold change, the hold image including the changing hold image Z and the effect symbol 120 reduced and retracted to the corner of the screen are displayed. Although it is displayed, for example, the "arrow" image and the hold image are excluded from the tone-down target, and the other parts including the staging symbol 120 are the tone-down target, so that the "arrow" image and the hold image are displayed. Is designed to stand out visually. At this time, the reserved image including the variable pending image Z is displayed in white (normally reserved), which is the default.

Here, in the tone-down of the image, the priority of each layer (non-target layer) for displaying the image of the "arrow" that is not the target of the tone-down and the reserved image is set to the image of the effect symbol 120 or the like that is the target of the tone-down. It is performed by setting the priority of each layer (target layer) to be displayed higher than the priority, and arranging a specific layer for displaying tone-down data such as black translucency between the non-target layer and the target layer. For example, when an "arrow" appears, highlighting such as effect processing may be performed in addition to tone down. After the appearance of the "arrow", the "arrow" flies, approaches the variable pending image Z, and collides (hits) (FIG. 33 (b) → (c)), and the collided variable pending image. The display color of Z changes from white to red (FIG. 33 (d)). The staging before the hold change in FIG. 33 is a success pattern when the hold change is performed, but a failure pattern when the hold change is not performed may be provided. This failure pattern may be configured so that, for example, the "arrow" does not hit the floating pending image Z.

Subsequently, the sound effect of the hold change effect shown in FIG. 33 will be described. First, regarding the normal sound effect consisting of the sound output from the speakers 18 and 25, one type of BGM1 is continuously output throughout the hold change effect, and as a volume increase effect that temporarily raises the volume, "arrow". "Appearance sound" (first voice) when "" appears, "fanning sound (third voice)" when "arrow" approaches, and "collision change sound" (second voice) when "arrow" collides and changes color. ) Is output respectively. Further, regarding the specific sound effect of generating the operation sound by driving the predetermined portion by the drive means, the vibration sound caused by the vibration device 72 vibrating the effect button 41 is parallel to, for example, the "collision change sound" in the normal sound effect. Occurs.

Further, in FIG. 33, the change history of the volume (dB) of the execution sound due to the sound effect (normal sound effect and specific sound effect) is a volume level (set volume) 3 to 7 (set volume) that can be selected in the normal mode and the power saving mode (set volume). (See FIG. 28) Each is displayed as a numerical value and a graph. As is clear from the figure, in this hold change effect, regardless of the volume level, the big hit mode (specific mode) is applied to the final section (2s to 3s) included in the latter half section of the hold change effect (0 to 3s). The volume (second volume) such as the "collision change sound" generated when suggesting the possibility of becoming is the "appearing sound" generated at the start (0s) included in the first half section of the hold change effect (specific notice). It is louder than the volume of the above (first volume). In addition, the volume (third volume) of the "fanning sound" or the like generated in the middle section (1s) before the final stage section after the start of the hold change effect is the "appearing sound" or the like generated at the start of the hold change effect. It is lower than the volume (first volume).

As described above, in the hold change effect (specific effect) shown in FIG. 33, the first half section that does not yet suggest the possibility of the jackpot mode (specific mode) and the second half section that suggests the possibility of the jackpot mode (specific mode). In the first half section, the sound (first sound) related to the hold change effect (specific effect) is output at the first volume, and in the second half section, the sound (second sound) related to the hold change effect (specific effect) is output. It is designed to output at a second volume that is higher than the first volume, and further, after the first half section where the audio output at the first volume is executed, before the second half section where the audio output at the second volume is executed, the relevant The sound (third sound) related to the hold change effect (specific effect) is output at a third volume smaller than the first volume.

As described above, by generating the "appearance sound" or the like to be executed when the notice appears at the first volume, the player can first notice that the notice has appeared. That is, it is possible to invite the player's eyes from the smartphone to the liquid crystal screen on the surface of the gaming machine. Further, in the example of FIG. 33, in addition to this, since the screen is toned down on the LCD screen, it is possible to give a different impression to the player who has shifted his / her eyes to the LCD screen. , The player's eyes can be nailed to the LCD screen. Of course, it is not limited to the toned-down screen, but it may be a white-out screen, and at that time, by displaying the image of the "arrow" already, a mechanism for fixing the player's eyes should be provided. You may do it.

Next, it is desirable that the volume (third volume) of the "fluttering sound" or the like generated after the "appearing sound" is lower than the volume of the "appearing sound" or the like (first volume). The point of this is that the role of the sound output here is just a "sound". In other words, the player who has shifted his eyes from the smartphone to the liquid crystal screen has a feeling of expectation that the production with relatively high expectations will be performed, and he may stop operating the smartphone and look at the liquid crystal screen. Although it is conceivable, the "fanning sound" executed at this timing is a sound effect for inciting whether or not the subsequent change in the reserved image (effect suggesting the degree of expectation) is executed or not, for example, the first. By executing at a volume higher than the 1st volume or the 2nd volume, an excessive sense of expectation is given, and when the production with high expectation is not executed after that, a great disappointment is given to the player. I am considering the risk of getting rid of it. In particular, this is the moment when the player's interest was taken from the smartphone to the liquid crystal screen, so if the production and notice are configured without considering such risks, the pending image will change (expected) as a result. There is a great deal of disgust given when the effect that suggests the degree is not executed, and even if the same effect or notice is executed after that, the known player will see the timing (effect or notice appears) that he or she aimed at. There is a high possibility that the line of sight will not be transferred from the smartphone to the liquid crystal screen at the same timing. Taking these factors into consideration, the volume of the "fanning sound" (third volume) is the volume of the "appearing sound" (first volume) and the subsequent volume of the "collision change sound" (second volume). It is desirable to configure it at a volume lower than).

Next, when a "collision change sound" or the like is generated following the "fanning sound", that is, when a change in the reserved image (an effect suggesting the degree of expectation) is executed, the "collision change sound" or the like is generated. It is desirable to set the volume (second volume) to be higher than the volume such as "appearing sound" (first volume) and the volume such as "fanning sound" (third volume). One of the purposes of setting such a setting is to increase the interest of the player who has already moved his / her eyes from the smartphone to the LCD screen to the change of the reserved image to be executed (the effect suggesting the degree of expectation). To maximize the atmosphere. The second purpose is to appeal again to the players who unfortunately couldn't take their eyes off at the time of the announcement. Since some players are not interested in the appearance of the notice and are only interested in the result of the notice, the volume is louder than the "appearance sound" or "fanning sound" for such a player. By generating a "collision change sound" or the like, it is possible to effectively direct the line of sight to the liquid crystal screen.

As described above, the hold change notice shown in FIG. 33 attracts more attention of the player than the case where the hold change effect is simply executed (the effect of only changing the color of the hold depending on the effect image). For example, even a player who concentrates on the operation of a smartphone and has no eyes on the liquid crystal display can pay attention to the liquid crystal display. And, by combining such a production that steals the eyes from the smartphone and a normal production that is not so in a more optimal form, it is possible to execute the production that steals the eyes from the smartphone more effectively. Become. In other words, not only one of the productions, but also the coexistence of each, and by creatively devising the execution at the more optimal timing and expression, we can realize the unprecedented production expression and at the same time, it is a recent issue. It is possible to steal the player's eyes and attention from a certain smartphone.

Further, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect button 41 is vibrated at the timing of outputting the “collision change sound” or the like to generate the vibration sound, for example, the volume control means 39 is operated to set the volume level low. Even for players who are concentrating on smartphones, it is possible to appeal to the player by the vibration sound generated at a substantially constant volume regardless of the volume level, and it is possible to effectively grab the eyes.

In the numerical values and graphs of the volume change history shown in FIG. 33 described above, the volume of the execution sound including the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect is displayed, but in FIG. 34, the volume of the execution sound of those normal sound effects is displayed. And the volume of the execution sound by the specific sound production are displayed separately. Of the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect, the volume of the execution sound changes only in the normal sound effect due to the change in the volume level (set volume), and the volume level (set volume) changes in the specific sound effect. However, it does not change the volume of the execution sound. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, the change history of the volume due to the normal sound effect has substantially the same shape at each volume level, and the volume level is changed from 3 (first set volume) to 7 (second set volume). The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in volume, is always about 1.2. On the other hand, the volume of the vibrating sound in the specific sound effect is 80 dB regardless of the volume level. The value of 80 dB, which is the volume of the specific sound effect, is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3 during the same period, and is also the volume of the normal sound effect at the maximum volume level 7. Is smaller than.

On the other hand, looking at the change history of the volume of the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect (FIG. 33), the volume level is during the period when the normal sound effect is generated and the specific sound effect is not generated (non-specific period). The rate of increase, which is the volume increase when changing from 3 to 7, is about 1.2 (first volume ratio), but the period during which both the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect occur (specific period). The rate of increase in the middle is smaller than 1.2 (second volume ratio). The combined volume LP (dB) obtained by synthesizing the first volume LP1 (dB) and the second volume LP2 (dB) can be obtained by the mathematical formula shown in FIG. 35.

As described above, in the hold change effect shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the minimum volume level (first set volume) 3 that can be changed by the player operation and the maximum volume level (second set volume) are set. In the case of being set to 7, the non-specific period in which the volume ratio of the executed sound when the sound effect is executed is the first volume ratio, and the specific period in which the volume ratio is the second volume ratio smaller than the first volume ratio. Is provided. Further, the normal sound effect is executed during the non-specific period, but the specific sound effect is not executed, and the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect are executed during the specific period. Further, the volume produced by the specific sound effect is set to be lower than the volume produced by the normal sound effect during the specific period when the maximum volume level (second set volume) 7 is set.

Further, when the hole setting value by the volume adjustment knob 140 is set to T4, as shown in FIG. 28, the initial position of the volume level is set to the volume level 4 corresponding to the player set value M2. In this case, in the example of 2s to 3s in FIG. 34, when the volume level 3 (first level) is set, the volume of the normal sound effect is louder than the volume of the specific sound effect, so that the specific sound effect is produced. While the volume of the normal sound effect is more difficult to hear (listen to) than the volume of the normal sound effect, when the volume level 7 (third level) is set, the volume of the normal sound effect is higher than the volume of the specific sound effect. Since it is small, the volume of the normal sound effect is easier to hear (listen) than the specific sound effect. Further, when the volume level 4 (second level) is set, the volume level 3 (first level) is set and the volume level 7 (third level) is set. , The difference between the volume due to the specific sound effect and the volume due to the normal sound effect is small. In this case, the reset means (second volume level changing means) 146b changes (reset) the volume level to the volume level 4 (second level) when a predetermined reset condition is satisfied (FIG. 32). It has become. The same can be said for the case where the hole setting value is set to T4 and the case where it is set to T5 and T6, but in these cases, the second level which is the initial position (in the case of T5, the volume level). In the case of 5, T6, when the volume level is set to 6), the difference between the volume due to the specific sound effect and the volume due to the normal sound effect is smaller than when the volume level 7 (third level) is set. However, it is louder than the case where the volume level 3 (first level) is set.

It should be noted that the first hold change effect shown in FIG. 33 and the second hold change effect excluding the specific sound effect from the first hold change effect are provided, and the first hold change effect is more than the case where the second hold change effect appears. It may be controlled so that the possibility of the big hit mode is higher when the effect appears. Further, in the hold change effect shown in FIG. 33, the display mode of the changing hold image Z corresponding to the change is changed, but the display modes such as the first hold images X1 to X4 and the second hold images Y1 to Y4 are displayed. It may be changed at any timing. Further, the display mode other than the display color, for example, the shape, the size, etc. may be changed with respect to the reserved image.

Subsequently, specific examples of the effect during the normal fluctuation (symbol fluctuation due to the normal fluctuation pattern) are divided into the probabilistic change state (special gaming state) shown in FIG. 36 and the normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 37 and 38. explain.

The normal fluctuation in the probabilistic state (high probability) has a short fluctuation time of about several seconds, and in the example of FIG. 36, as an image effect, the normal fluctuation of about 2 seconds due to the effect symbol 120 in front of the background image for high accuracy (high accuracy). Start-> high-speed fluctuation-> stop) is repeated. Further, in the example of FIG. 36, as a normal sound effect, a high-accuracy BGM is continuously output, and as a symbol variation sound, a “start sound” is used as a symbol variation according to the start of the symbol variation and the high-speed variation. A "stop sound" is output at the same time as the stop.

Further, in the example of FIG. 36, various notices are executed in a specific symbol variation. That is, vibration caused by the vibration device 72 vibrating the effect button 41 in accordance with the symbol stop and the output of the "stop sound" at each timing of the elapsed time of 8s, 10s, and 12s corresponding to three consecutive symbol fluctuations. Sound is generated (specific sound production). Further, at the timing of the elapsed time of 14 s corresponding to the next symbol change, for example, the entire screen is toned down as shown in FIG. 36 (a), and as a volume increase effect, "change" is performed in accordance with the "stop sound". "Sound" is output. Further, at the timing of the elapsed time 16 s corresponding to the next symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), in addition to the same effect (screen tone down and volume increase effect) as in the elapsed time 14 s, the third board Ascending movement of the movable body 109 is performed (specific sound production). Further, at the timing of the elapsed time of 18 to 19 s corresponding to the next symbol change, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the board third movable body 109 returns to the origin and the board second movable body 108 swings. Will be.

Further, FIG. 36-1 shows the volume of the execution sound of the normal sound effect and the volume of the execution sound of the specific sound effect separately for the range of 6s to 14s in FIG. 36. As shown in FIG. 36-1, the change history of the volume due to the normal sound effect has substantially the same shape at each volume level, and the volume level is changed from 3 (first set volume) to 7 (second set volume). The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in volume in the case, is always about 1.2. On the other hand, the volume of the vibrating sound in the specific sound effect is 80 dB regardless of the volume level, which is louder than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 5 in any of 8s, 10s, and 12s, and the volume level. It is almost the same as or lower than the volume of the normal sound effect at 6.

On the other hand, looking at the change history of the volume of the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect (FIG. 36), the volume level is changed from 3 to 7 during the period when the specific sound effect does not occur (non-specific period). In this case, the rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume, is about 1.2, but for example, at the timing of elapsed time of 8s, 10s, and 12s, both normal sound effect and specific sound effect (vibration sound) occur. (Specific period), the rate of increase is less than 1.2. Further, both the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect occur at the timings of the elapsed time 16s, 18s, and 19s, but the rate of increase at the time point of the elapsed time 16s is 1.2, which is the same as the non-specific period. There is. This is because the moving sound of the third movable body 109 of the board is about 50 dB, which is very small compared to the sound from the speaker, and has almost no effect on the overall volume change.

In the normal fluctuation during the normal gaming state (low accuracy) shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, first, the symbol fluctuation is performed once in the period of the elapsed time of 1s to 9s, and the fluctuation starts at the elapsed time of 1s. After performing high-speed fluctuations in 2s to 5s, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped in this order in 6s to 9s to make a final stop. In addition, as a normal sound effect, a normal BGM is continuously output, and as a symbol variation sound, a "start sound" is generated at each stop of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol according to the start of the symbol variation. At the same time, "stop sound" is output respectively. Further, at the time of 3s during high-speed fluctuation, the SU1 gassing effect of the SU effect appears, for example, a predetermined line is displayed as a telop on the screen, and a predetermined "SU sound" is output from the speakers 18 and 25.

Further, in the next symbol variation performed in the period of elapsed time of 10s to 23s, SU1, SU2, and SU3 effects of SU production are sequentially executed in 11s, 12s, and 13s during high-speed fluctuation, and predetermined lines are displayed on the screen respectively. The telop is displayed and the "SU sound" is output from the speakers 18 and 25, and the SU3 confirmation effect, that is, an image showing the SU3 confirmation is displayed on the screen in the subsequent 14s to 16s. Further, at the time of the SU3 confirmation effect, after the "determination sound" is output as the volume increase effect, the character's dialogue (character voice) is output as voice.

Further, in the next symbol variation performed from the elapsed time of 24 s, at the start of the variation, a vibration sound (specific sound effect) of the effect button 41 is generated in accordance with the output of the "start sound" (normal sound effect) (normal sound effect). And a special production that performs a specific sound production together). This is an example of a jackpot suggestion effect (first special effect) that can suggest the possibility of a jackpot mode due to the symbol variation, and it is more likely that the jackpot mode will be achieved as compared with the case where no vibration sound is generated. Shows.

Further, FIG. 38-1 shows the volume of the execution sound of the normal sound effect and the volume of the execution sound of the specific sound effect separately for the range of 22s to 26s in FIG. 38. As shown in FIG. 38-1, the change history of the volume due to the normal sound effect has substantially the same shape at each volume level, and the volume level is changed from 3 (first set volume) to 7 (second set volume). The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in volume in the case, is always about 1.2. On the other hand, the volume of the vibrating sound in the specific sound effect is 80 dB regardless of the volume level, which is higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 6 and higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 7. Is also small.

On the other hand, looking at the change history of the volume of the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect (FIGS. 37 and 38), the volume level is set to 3 to 7 during the period when the specific sound effect does not occur (non-specific period). The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume when changed to, is about 1.2, but at the timing of the elapsed time of 24 s, both normal sound effect and specific sound effect (vibration sound) occur (specific). Period), the rate of increase is less than 1.2.

Further, when the volume due to the normal sound effect is compared between the normal fluctuation in the probabilistic state (special gaming state) shown in FIG. 36 and the normal fluctuation in the normal gaming state (low probabilistic middle) shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the probabilistic change is made. The average volume of the execution sound produced by the normal sound effect is louder in the state (special game state) than in the normal game state (an example when they are different). On the other hand, regarding the volume of the specific sound effect, there is no difference between the probabilistic state (special game state) and the normal game state. That is, in the present embodiment, the volume of the normal sound effect is larger than the volume of the specific sound effect in the probabilistic state (special game state) than in the normal game state. ) It is easier to hear the operation sound such as the vibration sound by the specific sound effect (easy to hear) with respect to the sound from the speakers 18 and 25 by the normal sound effect in the normal game state than in the middle.

In addition, when the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect are executed at the same time, the increase rate (sound effect when the minimum volume level is set), which is the change rate of the volume when the volume level is changed from 3 to 7. The volume ratio of the sound effect when set to the maximum volume level with respect to the above is the normal fluctuation in the probability variation state (special gaming state) shown in FIG. 36 and the normal gaming state (low probability) shown in FIGS. 37 and 38. Compared with the normal fluctuation of (middle), the probability change state (special game state) is larger than the normal game state.

In addition, the volume level of each execution sound when both the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect are executed in both the normal game state and the probabilistic state (special game state) is the minimum volume level (here). Then, when the volume level is set to 3), the volume of the normal sound effect is lower than the volume of the specific sound effect, and the volume of the normal sound effect is more difficult to hear than the specific sound effect. When the volume level is set to the maximum volume level (volume level 7 in this case), the volume of the normal sound effect is louder than the volume of the specific sound effect, and the volume of the normal sound effect is heard rather than the specific sound effect. It is easy to handle.

Next, two specific examples of the effect during the reach variation (the symbol variation after the reach due to the reach variation pattern) will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and 44 to 48, in which there is a difference in the jackpot reliability. In the reach production A (big hit reliability is low) shown in FIGS. 39 to 43, a production with the theme of a battle between a monster and a kappa, which is the main character, is performed. In the early period of the reach fluctuation (elapsed time 0s to 41s), the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect are executed, and the specific sound effect (operation sound) is not executed.

In this early period, the scene of the image production is "Reach title display"-> "Monster appearance"-> "Mini monster appearance"-> "Main character (kappa) appearance"-> "Mini monster attack"-> "Main character avoidance & holding"-> " The main character attacks and repels mini monsters, ">" monsters reappear, "→" monsters attack the main character, "and each scene consists of one or more cuts (cut split).

Here, the cut split is a timing at which, for example, in a series of moving images composed of a plurality of scene images, the continuity of the images is cut off and the scene images (including not only still images but also moving images) are switched. For example, the case of switching from the first scene to the second scene is applicable. By switching the scene, for example, the display content of the liquid crystal display shifts from the image of the ally character drawn in the first scene to the image of the monster drawn in the second scene. In this way, by switching the scene of the image of the character to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible to execute an expression that appears on the screen by the reach effect.

As a result, the content drawn in the first scene can be instantly switched to the second scene, so that the display content can be changed when you want to display a different character or switch to a different scene as described above. This is an effective technique for making sudden changes. Of course, the cut may change in the middle of the scene.

On the other hand, by expressing the image on the LCD so that it transitions up, down, left, or right (like when the video camera is shaken left, right, up, down) without using the cut split, for example, the opposite side from the ally character. There is also a technique to change the display target of the liquid crystal display to the monster located in. In this way, by making the image on the LCD screen transition while maintaining continuity, it is possible to make the player feel the positional relationship between the characters and the surrounding environment as described above. can. When creating a video such as a reach effect, one video is produced in a more optimal form by combining techniques such as cut splitting and video transition as described above.

In each scene, a text telop is displayed as needed. For example, in the "reach title display" scene (0s to 3s), the title telop such as "Monster VS Kappa" (Fig. 39 (a)) is a part of the scene from "Monster appearance" to "Mini monster appearance" (5s to). In 9s), monster dialogue telops such as "Kappa" (Fig. 39 (b), (c)), and in the latter half of the scene of "Avoiding and holding the hero" (17s-18s), hero dialogue telops such as "Exterminate!" (Fig. 39 (d)) In the scenes (32s-41s) from "Monster reappearance" to "Monster attacks the main character", monster dialogue telops such as "Kappa" (Fig. 39 (e)) are displayed on the screen respectively. Will be done. The effect symbol 120 is displayed back in the corner of the screen.

Here, regarding the scene of "reach title display", the display mode of the title telop, for example, the display color may be changed to suggest the reliability of the reach effect. Also, before the telop display of the reach title and / or the reading of the reach title (which will be described later), the first and second characters (here, monsters and kappa) are displayed on the screen as the characters used in the reach production. It may be displayed. As a result, after the player is made aware of the content of the reach effect, the display related to the reach title and the audio output can be executed, so that the player can perform the reach effect as compared with the case of displaying all at once. It is possible to make it easier to understand the contents. In addition, when the reliability differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the reach effect (when branching to the reach effect according to the appearing character), the character scheduled to appear is shown in advance. This makes it possible to display the reach title and the like after notifying the content of the reach effect of the branch destination. In this case, if the character telop is used to suggest the reliability when the reach title is displayed as described above, the player gradually informs the content of the reach effect → suggests the reliability. Since the information can be transmitted to the player, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the information as compared with the case where the information is transmitted all at once. In addition, it is desirable to read out the reach title by voice, which will be described later, with all the contents in order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach title may be read aloud, or after the reach title is read aloud, the telop display of the reach title, the reliability suggestion, the display of the first and second characters appearing, and the like may be executed. .. As a result, the player can be made to feel the unexpectedness, so that the production interest at the timing when the reach production is started can be enhanced.

Further, in the normal sound production during this early stage, a plurality of types of BGMs are sequentially reproduced according to the scene, and a voice (telop voice) corresponding to the telop displayed on the screen is reproduced. That is, the telop voice for reading the reach title is displayed during the display of the telop related to the reach title of "Monster VS Kappa" (0s to 3s), and the monster voice is displayed while the telop regarding the dialogue of the monster is displayed (5s to 9s, 32s to 41s). During the telop display (17s to 18s) related to the dialogue of the main character, the main character voice is output from each speaker.

At this time, when a specific voice (here, the main character voice corresponding to the main character's dialogue telop) is output (elapsed time 17s, 18s), the playback of the BGM up to that point is paused, and at the end of the specific voice. BGM playback is resumed. At this time, the restarted BGM is different from the immediately preceding BGM. In this way, when a specific voice (hero voice) is output at the timing of switching from the first BGM to the second BGM, a BGM stop period (output stop period) is provided from the stop of the first BGM to the start of the second BGM. , A specific voice (a predetermined sound different from the first and second BGM) may be output during this BGM stop period. Also, in this case, at the timing when the BGM stop period ends, that is, at the timing when the second BGM is output, the scene from the "hero avoidance & holding" scene (first scene) to the scene of "the hero attacks and repels the mini monster" (second). The scene is changed to (scene). The BGM stop period may be a muffling period in which no sound is output from the speaker.

Further, in the normal sound production during this early period, in addition to the telop voice corresponding to the telop, the reach production voice corresponding to each scene of the reach production is output, and the volume increase production is executed at an arbitrary timing. For example, in a part of the scene (19s-29s) of "the main character attacks and repels a mini monster", the dialogue voice (mini voice) of the mini monster that is not displayed as a telop is output. Also, in the "hero avoidance & stance" scene (15s-18s), the "avoidance sound" is output when the hero avoids the attack of the mini monster, and the "stance sound" is output when the hero is stance, and the "hero" is output. In a part of the scene (21s, 31s) of "attacking and repelling mini monsters", "attack sound" is output according to the attack of the main character, and "repulsion sound" is output according to the repulsion of mini monsters.

In the middle period (elapsed time 42s to 63s) of the reach fluctuation, a specific sound effect (operation sound) is executed in addition to the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect. In this middle period, the image production scene progresses in the order of "holding the hero"-> "monster & hero on the verge of collision"-> "character effect"-> "rainbow effect"-> "defeat"-> "monster collapse".

In this middle period, the button effect and the corresponding movable body effect are the main, and the telop is not displayed on the screen except for a part. First, in the scene (42s-48s) of "holding the hero" → "monster & hero is on the verge of collision", the screen is toned down (visibility is suppressed) and the fade-in image of the staging button 41 is displayed on the screen. (FIG. 41 (f)), the button pressing guidance image and the gauge image for causing the player to press the effect button 41 are displayed, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 41 (g)). The button pressing guidance image is composed of, for example, a moving image showing how the effect button 41 is pressed, a character image such as "press!", And the like. The gauge image shows the remaining time of the operation valid period in real time. At this time, the image related to the button effect, that is, the button fade-in image, the button press guidance image, the gauge image, etc. should be excluded from the tone-down target, and the other parts including the effect symbol 120 should be the tone-down target. Therefore, it is desirable to make the image related to the button effect visually conspicuous.

Further, during the display period (42s to 45s) of the fade-in image of the effect button 41, a "fade-in sound" is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect, and the rotating body 44 of the movable effect means 42 shakes and the board. An operation sound is emitted by the ascending operation of the third movable body 109 (FIG. 41 (f) → (g)). At this time, since the operating noise such as "rattling" due to the shaking motion of the rotating body 44 is relatively loud, the volume level is changed from 3 to 7 at the time of 42s when the shaking motion of the rotating body 44 is performed. The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume, is smaller than 1.2. On the other hand, since the moving sound of the third movable body 109 of the board is about 50 dB, which is very small compared to the sound from the speaker, the increase rate of 42s to 45s is 1.2, which is the same as the non-specific period.

Here, a pattern that does not cause the rotating body 44 to shake at the time of pre-fade notification, that is, a pattern that does not generate an operation sound such as "rattling" may be provided. Further, instead of the rotating body, the first movable body 107 of the board, the third movable body 109 of the board, and the like may be shaken up and down to generate an operation sound.

In addition, during the display period (46s to 48s) of the button pressing guidance image, a pressing guidance voice such as "press the button" and a "pressing guidance sound" as a volume raising effect are output from the speaker, and the board is output. 3 The movable body 109 is temporarily stopped at a predetermined position, and the second movable body 108 of the board is shaken and the rotating body 44 is rotated. At the time when the button pressing guidance image is displayed, the reproduction of the BGM is paused, and the pressing guidance voice or the like is output while the BGM is stopped.

Here, the pressing guidance sound is continuously output until, for example, the player presses the effect button 41 and the operation valid period ends, whereas the pressing guidance voice such as "press the button" is used. The output is stopped at the time when the output is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once) (at the time of 47s in the example of FIG. 41), and the output is not continued until the end of the operation valid period. Of course, the push guidance voice may be continuously output until the end of the operation valid period, but in that case, the output of the push guidance voice is likely to be cut off in the middle. In that case, if the press guidance voice is being output at the end of the operation valid period, the output may be continued until the end.

When the effect button 41 is pressed during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends, and the button press guidance image or the like fades out from the screen (49s). Further, in the subsequent "rainbow effect" scene (51a to 60s), for example, a rainbow effect (rainbow effect) in which the entire screen has a rainbow-colored gradation is executed.

When the effect button 41 is pressed, the effect button 41 vibrates due to the drive of the vibration device 72, and a "vibration sound" is output from the speaker (49s or more). In this way, by vibrating the effect button 41 when the player presses the effect button 41, the player can be surely recognized the vibration. A vibration sound is generated by vibrating the effect button 41 with the vibration device 72. However, as described above, the volume of the specific sound effect is set when the player does not touch the effect button 41 (the specific volume change operation is performed). The maximum volume is reached (when not performed), and when the player is touching or pressing the effect button 41 (when a specific volume change operation is performed), the vibrating device (driving means) 72. The drive of the effect button (predetermined part) 41 is restricted, and the volume of the vibration sound is suppressed as compared with the state where the effect button 41 is not touched. Therefore, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the volume of the actual vibration sound by outputting the "vibration sound" from the speaker when the effect button 41 is vibrated.

As described above, the volume can be changed by the normal sound effect even when the player operates the volume control means 39 even when the normal sound effect is not being executed, whereas the effect button (predetermined part) of the player can be changed. The volume can be changed by the specific sound effect by touching or pressing the 41 only during the execution of the specific sound effect. The "vibration sound" from this speaker may be output only during the vibration period (49s to 53s) of the effect button 41, but in the example of FIG. 41, even if the vibration period of the effect button 41 ends. After that, the "vibration sound" from the speaker is continuously output for a certain period (~ 56s).

Here, the vibration sound output from the speaker (normal sound effect) may be output in a shorter period than the actual vibration effect and the vibration sound generated accompanying the actual vibration effect (specific sound effect). Further, a plurality of types of vibration sounds output from the speaker may be provided. Further, a plurality of vibration sounds may be output from the speaker according to the actual vibration effect, the length of the vibration sound generated accordingly, and the vibration pattern. Further, even if the actual vibration effect and the length and the vibration pattern of the vibration sound generated by the actual vibration effect are different, one type of vibration sound may be output from the speaker. It is desirable that the vibration sound output from the speaker is similar to the vibration sound generated by the actual vibration effect, but the vibration sound is not limited to this, and may not be similar to the vibration sound output from the speaker. Even in this case, by outputting in parallel with the actual vibration sound, both can be synchronized and coordinated to generate a peculiar vibration sound, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, during the actual vibration effect, there may be a case where the vibration sound is output from the speaker and a case where the vibration sound is not output, or the reliability may be suggested depending on which of them is used. In addition, when the vibration effect is executed at the time of the effect of notifying the hit at the end of the reach, the vibration sound is output from the speaker, and when the vibration effect is executed as a suggestion of reliability during the fluctuation, the speaker vibrates. It may be configured not to output sound. As a result, it is possible to configure different production modes depending on the role of the vibration effect. Of course, it is configured to output the vibration sound from the speaker in both the case where the vibration effect is executed at the time of the effect of notifying the hit at the end of the reach and the case where the vibration effect is executed as a suggestion of reliability during the fluctuation. May be good.

Further, when the effect button 41 is pressed, the following post-operation effects are executed by the movable bodies 107 to 109 (49s to 54s). That is, the third movable body 109 of the board resumes the ascending movement (49s or more), and when it reaches the maximum operating position, it stands by at that position (51s or more). Subsequently, when the first movable body 107 of the board starts to move downward (51s or more) and reaches the maximum operating position and is vertically integrated with the third movable body 109 of the board (53s), the movable bodies 107 to 109 are integrated. The effect is performed, and as shown in FIG. 41 (h), for example, the second movable body 108 of the board performs a rotational operation (53s to 54s). During the post-operation effect, a "movable sound" corresponding to the operation of the movable bodies 107 to 109 is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect. Further, at a predetermined timing after the effect button 41 is pressed, the reproduction of the BGM is started after the button is pressed (52s to).

When the post-operation effect (49s to 54s) is completed, the first movable body 107 of the board and the third movable body 109 of the board each start moving to the origin position (FIGS. 41 (h) → (i)), for example. At a predetermined timing during movement, the main character voice corresponding to the successful button press is output from the speaker, and at the timing when each movable body 107, 109 reaches the origin position of each, the speaker "returns to origin sound" as a volume increase effect. Is output.

In the scenes of "defeat" and "monster collapse" after the end of "Rainbow Effect" (61s-63s), the main character's dialogue is displayed as a telop on the screen, and the main character's voice corresponding to that dialogue is output from the speaker. At the end, the dialogue (monster voice) of the fallen monster is output. The BGM playback is stopped during the "defeat" scene, and a new BGM playback is started during the output of the main character voice at the start of the "monster fall" scene (62s).

FIG. 43-1 shows the volume of the normal sound effect and the volume of the specific sound effect separately for the period of 42s to 61s of FIG. 41. As shown in FIG. 43-1 from 42s in which the rotating body 44 is swaying and the board third movable body 109 is raised as a specific sound effect, only the board third movable body 109 is raised in 43s. For the period from 46s to 47s when the rotating motion of the rotating body 44 and the swinging motion of the second movable body 108 of the board are performed after about 45 s, the volume of the specific sound effect is the case of all the volume levels that can be set. It is lower than the volume of the normal sound production.

After that, at the time of 48s, as the specific sound effect, the shaking operation of the second movable body 108 of the board is completed and only the rotational operation of the rotating body 44 is performed. Therefore, the volume due to the specific sound effect is slightly reduced, but the normal sound effect is produced. As for, the volume of the specific sound effect is louder than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3, because the BGM is stopped and the press guidance voice ends and the volume drops sharply. It is lower than the volume of the normal sound effect in the case of the above volume level 4.

Subsequently, during the period of 49s to 53s when the vibration sound of the effect button 41 is generated, the volume of the specific sound effect is maintained at a state higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3. Specifically, the volume of the specific sound effect during the period from 49s to 52s is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3 and lower than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 4, and is 53s. The volume of the specific sound effect at the time point is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 4 and lower than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 5. Then, after 54 s after the vibration sound of the effect button 41 is finished, the volume of the specific sound effect is the normal sound effect in the case of all the settable volume levels, except for 55 s in which the volume of the normal sound effect suddenly drops. It is lower than the volume of.

In the final period of the reach fluctuation (elapsed time 64s to 98s), the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect are executed, and the specific sound effect (operation sound) is not executed except for the vibration sound of 93s to 95s.

In this final stage, the scene of the image production is "The hero pursues and destroys the monster trying to attack again" → "Golden effect" → "Black background" → "Golden effect" → "The hero waving the flag "→" Golden effect ".

In the scene of "the main character pursues and destroys the monster trying to attack again", after the effect symbol 120 being displayed for evacuation is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (j) (64s to 69s), the figure is shown. As shown in 42 (k), the temporary stop is performed in a normal jackpot mode such as "4, 4, 4" (70s to 77s). In this scene, for example, before the enlarged display of the staging symbol 120 (64s to 67s), the hero's dialogue is displayed as a telop, and the hero's voice corresponding to the dialogue is output. Also, as a volume increase effect. The "defeat sound" when defeating a monster is output from the speaker.

In the following "golden effect" scene (78s to 80s), as shown in FIG. 42 (l), the golden effect that makes the entire screen golden is executed, and the temporarily stopped effect symbol 120 is reduced, for example. Re-variation (full rotation) is started, BGM is switched, and "re-variation sound" is output from the speaker as a volume raising effect.

Then, in the next "golden effect" scene with the "black background" where the entire screen is blacked out, the button effect is performed again. That is, after the pre-fade notification is performed on the screen from the end of the "black background" to the beginning of the "golden effect" (FIG. 43 (m)), the fade-in image of the effect button 41 is displayed (FIG. 43 (n). )), Then, the button pressing guidance image and the gauge image are displayed, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 43 (o)). In the pre-fade notification, for example, an image in which the effect button 41 is rotated is displayed.

In addition, after the pre-button effect voice for notifying the start of the button effect is output at the timing straddling the button fade-in from the pre-fade notification, the press guidance voice such as "press the button" is the button press guidance image. Is output after the display of is started. Furthermore, as a volume increase effect, a "background change sound" is output from the speaker during the "black background" scene, and a "fade-in sound" is output from the speaker while the fade-in image is displayed.

Regarding the content of the pre-fade notification, when blacked out, an image similar to the effect button image or the effect button image and a related image for deriving the effect button image are displayed, and those images are blacked out images. By displaying the image on the front side, the image display related to the operation effect is configured to be displayed more prominently (FIG. 43 (m)). As a result, the player can sense that the operation timing of the effect button 41 is about to arrive at the timing before the fade-in image of the effect button image and the operation button image is actually displayed.

Here, it may be decided whether or not to execute the pre-fade notification according to the reliability of the operation effect and the reach effect. For example, when the pre-fade notification is executed, the pre-fade notification is performed. There is a possibility that the subsequent operation effect will be more successful than if it was not executed (success = big hit notification when notifying that the fluctuation is a hit by the operation result, and in other cases, the operation effect As a result, an effect suggesting a predetermined reliability may be executed). Further, when the pre-fade notification is executed, the subsequent operation effect may be configured to succeed without fail.

By blacking out the background during the pre-fade notification as described above, the visibility of the scene image on the screen can be reduced, and the pre-fade notification can be executed using the entire liquid crystal screen. It is considered that the person's consciousness and attention can be directed from the scene image to the pre-fade notification, but the screen mode other than the blackout (black background) may be executed to make the pre-fade notification stand out. The screen aspect is more conspicuous than the scene image (scene moving image) that is executed before the pre-fade notification is executed and is executed in the hierarchy with a low display priority even during the execution of the pre-fade notification (at least the scene). It suffices if the display priority is set higher than that of the image).

Further, the voice before the button effect may be any voice content that suggests the appearance of the operation effect to be executed after that. Further, the reliability may be different depending on the content of the voice before the button effect. For example, a voice content having a high possibility of success in the subsequent operation effect and a voice content having a low possibility of success are prepared and played. It may be configured to suggest the reliability of the operation effect depending on the content of the voice to be played. Further, not limited to this, for example, when there are a plurality of operation buttons used in the operation effect, a voice having a high possibility that a highly reliable operation button is derived and a highly reliable operation button are derived. A voice or the like that is unlikely may be prepared.

Further, as a mode of pre-fade notification, the content of the pre-button effect voice executed at substantially the same time may be displayed as a dialogue. In this case, unlike the telop displayed during reach, the dialogue, which is the content of the voice to be reproduced, may be displayed as characters in such a manner that the entire LCD screen is used larger.

In addition, the scenes are switched during the execution of the pre-fade notification, but in this case, the scenes are switched in the display hierarchy having a lower display priority than the pre-fade notification, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. , Scenes can be switched during pre-fade notification. Further, in that case, the switching scene image may be configured to be visible to the player. For example, by executing a blackout effect having a certain degree of transparency as a pre-fade notification, the back side thereof may be displayed during the blackout. It may be configured so that the mode in which the scene image is switched can be visually recognized. As a result, the pre-fade notification can improve the interest of the production, and the player can also visually recognize the switching of the scene images, so that the connection of the scene images can be grasped, which makes the scene more uncomfortable. No production is possible.

In addition, by configuring the scene image to progress on the back side of the pre-fade notification in this way, even if the reach effect is executed in a pattern in which the pre-fade notification is not executed, the appearance is apparent. Since the production content progresses as the scene image progresses, it is possible to execute the reach production without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this way, by switching the scene image during the execution of the pre-fade notification or by advancing the content of the scene image without switching, the above-mentioned effect can be exhibited.

When the effect button 41 is pressed during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends, the scene of "the main character waving the flag" (FIG. 43 (p)) is started, and the button press guidance image and the like are displayed from the screen. Fade out. In addition, after the main character voice regarding the re-lottery of the symbol is output, a "flag waving sound" is output as a volume raising effect.

From the end of the "hero waving the flag" scene to the beginning of the "golden effect", after the re-changing production symbol 120 is enlarged and displayed (93s to 94s), as shown in FIG. 43 (q), "7. The final stop is made in a probabilistic jackpot mode such as "7.7", and the final stop is made (95s to 98s). Further, from the enlarged display of the effect symbol 120 to the final stop (93s to 95s), the effect button 41 vibrates due to the drive of the vibration device 72, and a "vibration sound" is output from the speaker (specified as a normal sound effect). Special production that performs together with sound production). This is an example of a big hit notification effect (second special effect) capable of notifying that the stop symbol is in the big hit mode (specific mode). In addition, this jackpot notification effect (second special effect) is a normal sound effect (vibration sound by the effect button 41) with respect to the volume of the special sound effect (vibration sound by the effect button 41) as compared with the jackpot suggestion effect (first special effect) shown in FIG. The volume of BGM, vibration sound, etc. from the speaker is relatively low. Further, the jackpot notification effect (second special effect) has a longer effect time than the jackpot suggestion effect (first special effect) shown in FIG. 38.

FIG. 43-2 shows the volume of the normal sound effect and the volume of the specific sound effect separately for the period of 92s to 96s in FIG. 43. As shown in FIG. 43-2, during the period of 93s to 95s when the vibration sound of the effect button 41 is generated as the specific sound effect, the volume of the specific sound effect is the normal sound effect when the minimum volume level 3 is set. It remains louder than the volume. Specifically, the volume of the specific sound effect at the time of 93s and 95s is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3 and lower than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 4. The volume of the specific sound effect at the time of 94s is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 4 and lower than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 5.

Subsequently, the reach effect B (high hit reliability) shown in FIGS. 44 to 48 will be described. In the reach effect B shown in FIGS. 44 to 48, as in the reach effect A shown in FIGS. 39 to 43, the effect of the battle between the monster and the main character Kappa is performed. In the early period of the reach effect (elapsed time 0s to 39s), the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect are executed, and the specific sound effect (operation sound) is not executed.

In this early period, the image production scene changes from "reach title display" (Fig. 44 (a)) → "appearance of the main character (kappa)" (Fig. 44 (b)) → "repeating attacks and avoidances with each other" (Fig.). 44 (c)) → "Monster defense" → "Monster counterattack" (Fig. 45 (d)) → "Friend character" → "Monster avoidance" → "Monster counterattack" → "Mutual offense and defense" (Fig. 45 (e)) → It progresses in the order of "holding the hero" → "holding the monster & launching an attack", and each of these scenes is composed of one or more cuts.

In each of these scenes, a text telop is displayed as needed. For example, in the "reach title display" scene (0s to 3s), a title telop such as "Monster VS Kappa" is displayed (Fig. 44 (a)), and in the "hero (kappa) appearance" scene (4s to 13s), the main character's dialogue. The telop (Fig. 44 (b)) is displayed on the screen respectively. Further, the effect symbol 120 is displayed back in the corner of the screen.

The reach title of this reach effect B is "Monster VS Kappa" as in the reach effect A, but the display mode of the title telop is different from the reach effect A (FIG. 39 (a)) having a low jackpot reliability. There is. In this way, the reliability may be suggested by the display mode of the reach title. Although various examples have already been shown for the “reach title display” scene (FIG. 39) in the reach effect A, all of these examples can be applied to the reach effect B as well.

Further, in the normal sound production during this early stage, a plurality of types of BGMs are sequentially reproduced according to the scene, and a voice (telop voice) corresponding to the telop displayed on the screen is reproduced. That is, the telop voice for reading the reach title is displayed during the display of the telop regarding the reach title of "Monster VS Kappa" (0s to 3s), and the hero voice is the monster voice during the display of the telop regarding the dialogue of the main character (4s to 13s, 35s). During the telop display related to the dialogue (22s, 28s, 38s to 39s), the monster voice is output from the speaker, and during the telop display regarding the dialogue of the ally character (26s), the ally voice is output from the speaker.

Further, in the example of FIG. 44, when the reach effect BGM1 is switched to the reach effect BGM2 (elapsed time 14 s), the BGM stop period (from the stop of the reach effect BGM1 (first BGM) to the start of the reach effect BGM2 (second BGM)) Output stop period) is set, and the scene from "the main character (kappa) appears" (first scene) to "repeating each other's attacks and avoidance" (second scene) at the timing when the reach production BGM2 (second BGM) is executed. Changes are being made. Further, during the BGM stop period, a "change sound" (a predetermined sound different from the first and second BGM) that emphasizes the change of the scene is output. The BGM stop period may be a muffling period in which no sound is output from the speaker.

Further, in the normal sound production during this early period, in addition to the telop voice corresponding to the telop, the reach production voice corresponding to each scene of the reach production is output, and the volume increase production is executed at an arbitrary timing. For example, in a part (16s) of the scene of "repeating attack and avoidance with each other", the dialogue voice (monster voice) of the monster that is not displayed as a telop is output, and similarly, a part of the scene of "monster counterattack" (16s). In 23s), the monster voice is output, and in the scene of "offense and defense against each other", the ally voice of the ally character is output in 29s, the monster voice is output in 31s, and the main character voice is output in 33s. Here, in the scene of "offense and defense against each other" (Fig. 45 (e)), the main character and the monster appear on the screen, and the ally character does not appear, but the voice is the main character, the monster, and the ally character. Audio is being output. That is, for a ally character (a character that is less important than the main character), only the voice such as a line is output without appearing as an image on the screen.

For example, in the "reach title display" scene (0s to 3s), an "emphatic sound" is output corresponding to the read-aloud voice of the reach title, and a part of the "hero (kappa) appearance" scene (6s to 8s, In 12s, 14s), the "movement sound" is output in response to various movements of the main character, and the above-mentioned "change sound" is output at the end of the scene, and in a part of the "monster counterattack" scene (23s). , "Counterattack sound" is output in response to the counterattack action of the monster. In the reach effect A (FIG. 39), the emphasis sound is not output during the "reach title display". In this way, the reliability is suggested by whether or not a voice other than the telop voice (other than BGM) corresponding to the telop display is output during the telop display of the reach title, or the type of the voice (including BGM). It may be configured as follows.

In this early period, it is desirable to display the corresponding ally character as a scene image while the ally voice 1 is being output (20s to 21s). In that case, it is desirable to display a telop image corresponding to the voice. For the telop image, the reliability of the reach effect may be suggested by changing the display mode (display color, etc.). Of course, even when the ally voice 1 is being output and the corresponding ally character is displayed as a scene image, the telop image may not be displayed.

Further, when the scene expression is such that the corresponding ally character is not displayed in the scene image, such as during the output of the ally voice 2 (29s), only the voice may be played and the telop image may not be displayed. .. In this way, the expression (presence / absence of display, etc.) of the scene image or the telop image may be different depending on the content of the voice to be reproduced. Further, the telop image may be displayed even when the ally voice 2 is being output and the corresponding ally character is not displayed in the scene image. Originally, it is desirable not to display the telop image when the image of the corresponding ally character is not displayed, but when suggesting reliability using the telop image, display the telop image. It may be configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expression method is changed as described above according to the type of voice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, for a main character such as the main character among characters, during voice output. May be configured to always display both a character image (scene image) and / or a telop image. On the other hand, for characters that are less important than the main character, such as ally characters, the character image (scene image) and / or telop image are not displayed even during voice output. You may. As described above, as described above, the effect mode at the time of voice output may be different depending on the importance of the target character, the contribution during reach, the display frequency, and the like. Further, even if the characters are the same, the production mode may be different as described above depending on the progress and content of the reach effect. With this configuration, if there is a character with a relatively high frequency of speech or a character with a relatively low frequency of speech in the reach production, the scene image can be switched each time the voice of that character is played. It is not necessary to display the character, and the number of scene images can be reduced to reduce the effect data. Also, when creating a scene image, it is possible to create with a high degree of freedom without being bound by the output voice.

Further, in the reach effect, in a scene where the character that outputs the voice emits a line for the first time, it is desirable to display the corresponding character at the time of voice output in the scene image. Further, more preferably, it is desirable to display a telop image at that time. Further, at that time, the telop image may be changed to an aspect according to the reliability. Further, at the time of subsequent voice output, it is not always necessary to display the corresponding character as a scene image or a telop image, and in consideration of the progress in the reach production, for example, in the scene where the character appears, the above is described. It is desirable to configure it so that it has the following production mode.

Further, when the corresponding character is not displayed in the scene image when the voice is output, it is desirable not to display other characters as well. This makes it possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the voice being output is a voice by a different character. In that case, it is desirable to display a background image or the like on the screen. Even if a character different from the character corresponding to the voice is displayed, for example, a different ally character is displayed when the voice of the ally character is output, and a different enemy character is displayed when the voice of the enemy character is output. It is desirable to display a character with the same attribute as the character to be played so that the content of the dialogue is not confused between characters with different attributes such as an ally and an enemy. On the other hand, when playing back the voice of a ally character, a character having a different attribute from the character corresponding to the voice may be intentionally displayed, such as displaying an enemy character. Depending on the situation, it may work more effectively. In addition, the attributes of characters with different attributes are not limited to enemies / allies, but include various things such as gender, good / bad people, and animal types.

In the middle period (elapsed time 40s to 67s) of the reach fluctuation, in addition to the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect, a specific sound effect (operation sound) by the movable body effect is executed. In this middle period, the scene of the image production progresses in the order of "set the main character"-> "button effect effect background"-> "character effect"-> "rainbow effect"-> "monster collapse".

First, in the "protagonist gimmick" scene (40s-41s), after the monster line (monster voice) is output from the speaker, the hero's line is displayed on the screen across the next "button effect effect background". The telop is displayed and the main character's dialogue (hero voice) corresponding to the telop display is output from the speaker.

Further, when the "button effect effect background" scene (42s to 48s) is started, the fade-in image of the effect button 41 is displayed after the pre-fade notification is performed on the screen (FIG. 46 (f)). FIG. 46 (g)), subsequently, the button pressing guidance image and the gauge image are displayed, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 46 (h)). In the pre-fade notification, for example, an image in which the effect button 41 is rotated is displayed. Further, after the pre-button effect voice for notifying the start of the button effect is output during the pre-fade notification, the press guidance voice such as "press the button" is output after the display of the button press guide image is started.

In this reach effect B, the blackout (black background) is not executed at the time of the pre-fade notification, but the blackout (black background) may be executed in the same manner as the reach effect A. Further, the reliability may be suggested by whether or not to execute the blackout, or by the type of the screen aspect including the blackout. In addition, various examples have already been shown for the pre-fade notification in the reach effect A, but all of these examples are also applicable to the reach effect B.

Further, during the pre-fade notification on the screen, a "pre-fade notification sound" is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect, the rotating body 44 of the movable effect means 42 swings, and the third movable body 109 of the board rises. An operation sound is emitted by the operation. At this time, since the operation noise such as "rattling" due to the shaking motion of the rotating body 44 is relatively loud, the volume level was changed from 3 to 7 at the time of 42s to 44s when the shaking motion of the rotating body 44 is performed. The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume in the case, is smaller than 1.2. On the other hand, the moving sound of the third movable body 109 of the board is about 50 dB, which is very small compared to the sound from the speaker. It is .2.

Here, a pattern that does not cause the rotating body 44 to sway at the time of pre-fade notification, that is, a pattern that does not generate an operation sound such as "rattling" may be provided. Further, instead of the rotating body, the first movable body 107 of the board, the third movable body 109 of the board, and the like may be shaken up and down to generate an operation sound.

In addition, during the display period (46s to 48s) of the button pressing guidance image, a pressing guidance voice such as "press the button" and a "pressing guidance sound" as a volume raising effect are output from the speaker, and the board is output. 3 The movable body 109 is temporarily stopped at a predetermined position, and the second movable body 108 of the board is shaken and the rotating body 44 is rotated. At the time when the button pressing guidance image is displayed, the reproduction of the BGM is paused, and the pressing guidance voice or the like is output while the BGM is stopped.

When the effect button 41 is pressed during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends, and the button press guidance image or the like fades out from the screen (49s to 50s). Further, in the subsequent "rainbow effect" scene (51a to 60s), for example, a rainbow effect in which the entire screen has a rainbow-colored gradation is executed.

When the effect button 41 is pressed, the effect button 41 vibrates due to the drive of the vibration device 72, and a "vibration sound" is output from the speaker (49s or more). In this way, by vibrating the effect button 41 when the player presses the effect button 41, the player can be surely recognized the vibration. A vibration sound is generated by vibrating the effect button 41 with the vibration device 72. However, as described above, the volume of the specific sound effect is set when the player does not touch the effect button 41 (the specific volume change operation is performed). The maximum volume is reached (when not performed), and when the player is touching or pressing the effect button 41 (when a specific volume change operation is performed), the vibration device (driving means) 72 The drive of the effect button (predetermined part) 41 is restricted, and the volume of the vibration sound is suppressed as compared with the state where the effect button 41 is not touched. Therefore, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the volume of the actual vibration sound by outputting the "vibration sound" from the speaker when the effect button 41 is vibrated. The "vibration sound" from this speaker may be output only during the vibration period (49s to 53s) of the effect button 41, but in the example of FIG. 46, even if the vibration period of the effect button 41 ends. After that, the "vibration sound" from the speaker is continuously output for a certain period (~ 56s).

Although various examples have already been shown with respect to the vibration effect in the reach effect A and the vibration sound output from the speaker performed in parallel with the vibration effect, all of these examples can be applied to the reach effect B as well.

Further, when the effect button 41 is pressed, the following post-operation effects are executed by the movable bodies 107 to 109 (49s to 54s). That is, the third movable body 109 of the board resumes the ascending movement (49s or more), and when it reaches the maximum operating position, it stands by at that position (51s or more). Subsequently, when the first movable body 107 of the board starts to move downward (51s or more), reaches the maximum operating position, and is vertically integrated with the third movable body 109 of the board (53s), it is shown in FIG. 46 (i). As described above, the movable bodies 107 to 109 are integrally produced, and for example, the second movable body 108 of the board performs a rotational operation (53s to 54s). During the post-operation effect, a "movable sound" corresponding to the operation of the movable bodies 107 to 109 is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect. At a predetermined timing after the effect button 41 is pressed, BGM playback is started after the button is pressed (52s to).

When the post-operation effect (49s to 54s) is completed, the first movable body 107 of the board and the third movable body 109 of the board each start moving to the origin position (FIGS. 46 (i) → (j)), for example. At a predetermined timing during movement, the main character voice corresponding to the successful button press is output from the speaker, and at the timing when each movable body 107, 109 reaches the origin position of each, the speaker "returns to origin sound" as a volume increase effect. Is output.

In the "Monster Fall" scene after the "Rainbow Effect" ends (61s-67s), the line of the monster just before it falls is displayed as a telop on the screen, and the monster voice corresponding to that line is output from the speaker. When the monster finally collapses (Fig. 47 (k)), the monster voice is output again, and the "falling sound" is output as a volume increase effect. When changing the scene from "Rainbow Effect" to "Monster Collapse", the BGM will stop almost at the same time as the scene change, and the new BGM will be played later than the start of the new scene with the BGM stop period in between. It is supposed to be started.

FIG. 48-1 shows the volume of the normal sound effect and the volume of the specific sound effect separately for the period of 42s to 61s of FIG. 46. As shown in FIG. 48-1, from 42s to 44s in which the rotating body 44 is swaying and the board third movable body 109 is raised as a specific sound effect, only the board third movable body 109 is raised. For the period from 46s to 47s when the rotating motion of the rotating body 44 and the swinging motion of the second movable body 108 of the board are performed after 45 s, the volume of the specific sound effect is the case of all the volume levels that can be set. It is lower than the volume of the normal sound production.

After that, at the time of 48s, as the specific sound effect, the shaking operation of the second movable body 108 of the board is completed and only the rotational operation of the rotating body 44 is performed. Therefore, the volume due to the specific sound effect is slightly reduced, but the normal sound effect is produced. As for, the volume of the specific sound effect is louder than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3, because the BGM is stopped and the press guidance voice ends and the volume drops sharply. It is lower than the volume of the normal sound effect in the case of the above volume level 4.

Subsequently, during the period of 49s to 53s when the vibration sound of the effect button 41 is generated, the volume of the specific sound effect is maintained at a state higher than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3. Specifically, the volume of the specific sound effect during the period from 49s to 52s is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect at the minimum volume level 3 and lower than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 4, and is 53s. The volume of the specific sound effect at the time point is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 4 and lower than the volume of the normal sound effect at the volume level 5. Then, after 54 s after the vibration sound of the effect button 41 is finished, the volume of the specific sound effect is the normal sound effect in the case of all the settable volume levels, except for 55 s in which the volume of the normal sound effect suddenly drops. It is lower than the volume of.

In the final period of the reach fluctuation (elapsed time 68s to 98s), the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect are executed, and the specific sound effect (operation sound) is not executed. In this final stage, the scene of the image production is "Main character Banzai"-> "Golden curtain"-> "Golden effect"-> "Golden effect & golden curtain"-> "Golden effect"-> "Golden curtain"-> "Golden curtain" "Proceed in this order.

In the scene of the "hero Banzai", after the effect symbol 120 being displayed as an evacuation is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 47 (l) (68s to 73s), as shown in FIG. 47 (m), "4.4. Temporarily stop in a normal jackpot mode such as "4" (74s to 77s). Then, in the subsequent "golden curtain" scene, the BGM is changed, and as shown in FIG. 47 (n), the effect symbol 120 is covered with a golden curtain to hide it, and the "concealment sound" is used as a volume increase effect. Is output. Then, in the "golden effect" scene, as shown in FIG. 47 (o), the golden effect that makes the entire screen golden is executed, and at the same time, the staging symbol 120 reappears and starts re-variation (full rotation).

In the following scene of "Golden Effect & Golden Curtain" (82s-89s), the staging symbol 120 continues to fluctuate, and the staging symbol 120 is concealed by the golden curtain (Fig. 48 (p)) and non-concealed. The concealed state (FIG. 48 (q)) is alternately repeated. Then, after passing through the "golden effect" and "golden curtain" scenes (90s to 93s), in the "golden folding screen" scene (94s to 98s), the re-changing production symbol 120 is set against the background of the golden folding screen. After the enlarged display (94s to 95s), as shown in FIG. 48 (r), the final stop is performed in a normal jackpot mode such as "4.4.4", and the final stop is made (96s to 98s).

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the volume of the execution sound when the sound effect is executed in the case where the first set volume is set and the case where the second set volume is set. A non-specific period in which the ratio is the first volume ratio and a specific period in which the volume non is the second volume ratio smaller than the first volume ratio are provided, and the normal sound effect is executed during the non-specific period, but the specific sound effect is produced. Is not executed, and the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect are executed during the specific period. Further, when the second set volume is the upper limit value of the set volume that can be changed by the set volume changing means based on the volume adjustment operation by the player, and the volume by the specific sound effect is set to the second set volume. The volume is lower than the volume produced by the normal sound production during a specific period.

Further, based on the volume adjustment operation by the player, the volume level in the normal sound production is at least the first level, the second level where the volume is louder than the first level, and the volume is higher than the second level. It is provided with a first volume level changing means that can be changed to a large third level and a second volume level changing means that can change the volume level regardless of the volume adjustment operation based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. When the volume of the normal sound effect is set to be more difficult to hear than the specific sound effect when it is set to the first level by the first volume level changing means, and when it is set to the third level. Is set so that the volume of the normal sound effect is easier to hear than the specific sound effect, and when it is set to the second level, when it is set to the first level and / or to the third level. The difference between the volume due to the specific sound effect and the volume due to the normal sound effect is set to be smaller than when the level is set, and the second volume level changing means is the volume when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The level is changed to the second level.

In addition, the volume of the execution sound when the normal sound effect is executed differs between the normal game state and the special game state, and the volume level changing means is used in both the normal game state and the special game state. When set to the minimum volume level, the volume of the normal sound effect is set to be more difficult to hear than the specific sound effect, and when set to the maximum volume level, it is set to be higher than the specific sound effect. The volume of the normal sound effect is set so that it is easy to hear.

In addition, the first special effect that can suggest the possibility that the stop symbol may be in a specific mode when the specific sound effect is executed during the execution of the normal sound effect, and the specific sound effect are executed during the execution of the normal sound effect. In this case, it is possible to execute a second special effect that can notify that the stop symbol is in a specific mode, and the first special effect is the volume of the normal sound effect with respect to the volume of the specific sound effect as compared with the second special effect. Is configured to be relatively small. Further, the production time by the second special production is made longer than the production time by the first special production.

In addition, the volume of the normal sound effect can be changed based on the normal volume change operation by the player, the volume of the specific sound effect can be changed based on the specific volume change operation by the player, and the volume by the normal volume change operation. Can be changed even when the normal sound effect is not being executed, and the volume can be changed by the specific volume change operation only while the specific sound effect is being executed. Further, the specific volume changing operation is a contact and / or pressing operation to a predetermined portion, and it is possible to execute an operation guidance notification for guiding the player to the specific volume changing operation during the execution of the specific sound effect.

In addition, it is equipped with a display effect executing means capable of executing a display effect composed of a series of moving images in which a plurality of scenes are connected, and a sound effect executing means capable of executing a sound effect of outputting sound from the sound output means. During the execution of the display effect, the sound effect executing means starts executing the second sound effect after a muffling period in which no sound is output from the sound output means after the execution of the first sound effect, and the display effect executing means The scene of the display effect is changed from the first scene to the second scene at the timing when the second sound effect is executed. Further, the sound effect executing means starts the output of the second BGM after the BGM stop period after the output of the first BGM is stopped, and the display effect executing means starts the display effect scene from the first scene at the timing of outputting the second BGM. It is designed to change to the second scene. Further, during the BGM stop period, the voice output means outputs a predetermined sound different from that of each BGM.

In addition, the specific notice can be executed during the variable display of the symbol, and the specific notice includes the first half section that does not yet suggest the possibility of becoming a specific mode and the second half section that suggests the possibility of becoming a specific mode after the first half section. Has an audio output means capable of outputting a voice related to the specific notice when executing the specific notice, and the voice output means outputs the voice related to the specific notice at the first volume when executing the first half section. , When the latter half section is executed, the voice related to the specific notice is output at the second volume higher than the first volume. Further, after the execution of the first half section and before the execution of the second half section, the voice related to the specific notice is output at a third volume smaller than the first volume.

49 to 52 exemplify the second embodiment of the present invention, and an example in which the volume level setting table in the first embodiment is changed and the adjustable range of the volume level is different for each hole setting value. Shows. The parts not specifically mentioned in the following description are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, for the hole set values (A value) T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the volume is set for each player set value (B value) M1 to M5. As the level changes by a predetermined step value, the predetermined step value is different for each of the hole set values T3 to T7, and the larger the hole set value, the larger the predetermined step value. Further, the volume level corresponding to the minimum player set value M1 is the same for all of the hall set values T3 to T7. For example, the volume level corresponding to the hall set value T3 is 3,6,9,12,15 corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5, and the predetermined step value in this case is 3. On the other hand, the volume level corresponding to the hole set value T7 is 3,10,17,24,31 corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5, and the predetermined step value in this case is 7.

As described above, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the first instep value (for example, T3) is selected by the operation of the volume adjustment knob (instep operation means) 140, and the first instep value (for example, T3) is selected by the operation of the volume control means (B operation means) 39. When the 1st B value (for example, M1) is selected, the 1st predetermined value (for example, 3) is set, the 1st A value (for example, T3) is selected, and the 2nd B value is larger than the 1st B value. When (for example, M2) is selected, the second predetermined value (for example, 6) is set, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and when the first B value (for example, M1) is selected, the third value is selected. When a predetermined value (for example, 3) is set, a second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and a second B value (for example, M2) is selected, a fourth predetermined value (for example, 7) is set, and the first The amount of change between the predetermined value and the second predetermined value (for example, 3) and the amount of change between the third predetermined value and the fourth predetermined value (for example, 4) are made different, and the first instep value (for example, T3) is selected. , When the upper limit B value (for example, M5) at that time is selected, the first upper limit predetermined value (for example, 15) is set, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and the upper limit B value (for example, T4) at that time is selected. For example, when M5) is selected, the second upper limit predetermined value (for example, 19) is set, and since the first upper limit value and the second upper limit value are different, the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated on the game hall side. By doing so, it is possible to change the adjustable range of the volume level by the player. Moreover, since the first predetermined value and the third predetermined value are the same, it is possible to change the upper limit value of the adjustable range of the volume by operating the volume adjusting knob 140.

Further, while the volume of the normal sound effect changes according to the volume level setting, the volume of the specific sound effect is constant regardless of the volume level setting. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the volume control means (operation B). When the first A value (for example, M3) is selected by the means) 39, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected as compared with the case where the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by the volume adjustment knob (instep operating means) 140. ) Is selected, the volume of the normal sound effect is relatively higher than the volume of the specific sound effect.

In this embodiment, the initial position (default player set value) is different for each of the hole set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the initial positions in the case of the hole set values T3 to T7 are M1 to M5, respectively, and the larger the hole set value, that is, the larger the upper limit of the volume level, the more the initial position. Is also large.

The hole setting value T8 for the power saving mode is the same as the hole setting value T3 having the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, for example. Further, the hole setting value T9 for the power saving mode is set to be the same as the hole setting value T7 having the largest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, for example. The same applies to the initial position.

Further, among the hole set values T0 to T2 that are not normally selected on the game hall side, in the hole set value T0 for silence, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5 are all 0 (silence). The hall set value T1 is for presentation, for example, the volume level corresponding to the player set value M1 at the minimum stage is 1, and the volume level corresponding to the other player set values M2 to M5 is the same as the hall set value T3, for example. It has become. The hall set value T2 is for factory use, for example, the volume level corresponding to the player set value M1 at the minimum stage is 2, and the volume level corresponding to the other player set values M2 to M5 is, for example, the hall set value T3. Is the same as. In the case of the hole set values T0 to T2, the initial position is set to the minimum M1, for example.

Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall set value at that time (here, the player set value) regardless of the player set value by the volume operating means 39. The volume level corresponding to M5) is set. As described above, since the volume level of the error sound is always the upper limit corresponding to the hole setting value at that time, it cannot be changed by the player operating the volume control means 39, but it is related to the hall. It is possible for a person to change the volume by operating the volume control knob 140.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the initial position is different for each hole set value as shown in FIG. 49, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated during the display of the volume adjustment notification image PV, the first Similar to the embodiment, both the volume level and the volume adjustment notification image PV change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50E, the hole setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M1 (initial position), and the hole setting value is displayed while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed. Is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes sequentially in the order of 3 → 7 → 13 → 21 → 31 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value, and the volume is adjusted. Similarly, the broadcast image PV changes sequentially in the order of PV1 → PV2 → PV3 → PV4 → PV5 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

51 and 52 are modifications of FIG. 34 in the first embodiment according to the present embodiment, and the hall set value (selection value) by the volume adjusting knob (second operating means) 140 is set to the volume level. When set to T7 (first selection value) at which the upper limit value is maximum, the player set value (volume setting value) by the volume control means (first operation means) 39 is set to M1 (first volume setting value) to M5. FIG. 51 shows the change in volume when set to (second volume setting value). Similarly, when the hall setting value is set to T3 (second selection value) at which the upper limit of the volume level is the minimum. FIG. 52 shows a change in volume when the player set value (volume set value) is set to M1 (first volume set value) to M5 (second volume set value). As shown in FIG. 49, when the hole setting value is set to T3 (second selection value) and when it is set to T7 (first selection value), the case where it is set to T3 is the player setting. The volume level (second corresponding volume level) when the value is set to M5 (second volume setting value) is small. Further, the volume corresponding to the volume level 3 (first corresponding volume level), 10, 17, 24, 31 (second corresponding volume level) in FIG. 51 is the volume level 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 in FIG. 34. It is made to be the same as the volume corresponding to.

Comparing FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, since the lower limit value (first corresponding volume level) of the volume level is common and the upper limit value (second corresponding volume level) is lower in FIG. 52, the volume level is set from the lower limit value. The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in volume when the value is changed to the upper limit, is smaller in FIG. 52 (1.097) than in FIG. 51 (1.200). Further, in both the case of FIG. 51 in which the hole set value is set to T7 (first selection value) and the case of FIG. 52 in which the hole setting value is set to T3 (second selection value), the player When the set value is set to M1 (first volume setting value), the volume of the specific sound effect is louder than the volume of the normal sound effect, and the volume of the specific sound effect is easier to hear than the normal sound effect. It has become. Further, in both the case of FIG. 51 in which the hole set value is set to T7 (first selection value) and the case of FIG. 52 in which the hole setting value is set to T3 (second selection value), the player When the set value is set to M5 (second volume setting value), the volume of the specific sound effect is smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect, and the volume of the specific sound effect is difficult to hear with respect to the normal sound effect. It has become.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first B value is selected by the volume control means (B operation means) 39, the first A value is selected by the volume adjustment knob (A operation means) 140. When the second instep value is selected, the volume of the normal sound effect is relatively higher than the volume of the specific sound effect.

In addition, the volume is arranged on the front side of the main body and is used to change the player setting value (volume setting value) related to the volume level of the normal sound effect to M1 (first volume setting value) and M5 (second volume setting value). M1 (first volume setting) by setting the volume operation means (first operation means) 39 that can change the set value and one of a plurality of hole setting values (selection values) arranged on the rear side of the main body. It is equipped with a volume adjustment knob (second operating means) 140 that can change the first corresponding volume level corresponding to (value) and the second corresponding volume level corresponding to M5 (second volume setting value), and a plurality of hall setting values. (Selection value) is at least T7 (first selection value) and T3 (second selection value) having a smaller second corresponding volume level corresponding to the player set value M5 (second volume setting value). Including, regardless of whether the hole setting value T7 (first selection value) or T3 (second selection value) is set by the volume adjustment knob 140, the player setting value M1 (first selection value) is set by the volume control means 39. When set to 1 volume setting value), the volume of the specific sound effect becomes easier to hear than the volume of the normal sound effect, and the hall setting values T7 (first selection value) and T3 (first selection value) are set by the volume adjustment knob 140. Regardless of which of the second selection value is set, when the player setting value M5 (second volume setting value) is set by the volume control means 39, the volume of the normal sound effect is increased. The volume of the specific sound effect is configured to be difficult to hear.

53 and 54 exemplify the third embodiment of the present invention, and show an example in which the second embodiment is partially modified so that the initial position in the volume level setting table is the same between the hole setting values. There is.

The volume level setting table (FIG. 53) of the present embodiment differs from the volume level setting table (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment only in the initial position. That is, in the volume level setting table (FIG. 53) of the present embodiment, all the hole setting values T1 to T9 except silence are set, and the initial position is set to M5 corresponding to the maximum volume level. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the second embodiment, the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall set value at that time (here, the maximum stage) regardless of the player set value by the volume operating means 39. The volume level corresponding to the player set value M5) is set.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the initial position with respect to each hole set value is the same, if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume level is changed but the volume adjustment notification is notified. The image PV does not change (except when the volume adjustment knob 140 is changed from the initial position at the time of operation). For example, as shown in FIGS. 54 (a1) and 54 (b) to (e), the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed with the hole set value set to T3 and the player set value set to M5 (initial position). When the hole setting value is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes sequentially in the order of 15 → 19 → 23 → 27 → 31 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value. However, the volume adjustment notification image PV remains PV5 and does not change. However, if the player setting value is changed to, for example, M1 when the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T3 to T4, not only the volume level but also the volume adjustment notification is shown as shown in FIGS. 54 (a2) → (b). The image PV also changes.

When the initial position for each hole set value is the same as in the present embodiment, the initial position does not have to be a value corresponding to the maximum volume level. Further, the initial positions may be the same for some of the hole set values (for example, the hole set values T3 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the power saving mode), and the initial values of the other hole set values may be different.

55 and 56 exemplify the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and partially modify the second embodiment to make the maximum volume level different for at least a part of the hole setting values in the volume level setting table. , Except for the maximum volume level, the same example is shown.

The volume level setting table (FIG. 55) of the present embodiment is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment. Volume level assignments corresponding to the five-level player setting values of M1 to M5 by means 39 are set, and the hall setting values T0 are for silence, T1 is for presentation, T2 is for factory shipment, and T3 to. T7 is for the normal mode, and T8 and T9 are for the power saving mode.

Regarding the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the volume level increases as the player setting value rises from M1 to M5, but the hole setting value T3 for the player setting values M1 to M4. In all cases of ~ T7, the volume levels are the same at 20, 30, 40, and 50, whereas the volume levels are different for each of the hole set values T3 to T7 with respect to the player set value M5.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the maximum volume level is different for each of the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the upper limit value of the adjustable range of the volume level is changed by operating the volume adjustment knob 140. It is possible to do. Moreover, in the case of the present embodiment, since the volume levels other than the maximum volume level are common to the hall setting values T3 to T7, there is an advantage that even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is changed, a sense of discomfort is unlikely to occur when the player adjusts the volume. There is also.

In this embodiment, the initial position is different for each of the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 55, the initial positions in the case of the hole set values T3 to T7 are M1 to M5, respectively, and the larger the hole set value, that is, the larger the upper limit of the volume level, the more the initial position. Is also large.

The hole setting value T8 for the power saving mode is the same as the hole setting value T3 having the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, for example. Further, the hole setting value T9 for the power saving mode is set to be the same as the hole setting value T7 having the largest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, for example. The same applies to the initial position.

Further, regarding the hole set value T0, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5 are all 0 (silence). Regarding the hole setting value T1, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum stage player setting value M1 is 10, the volume level corresponding to the maximum stage player setting value M5 is 50, and the other player setting values M2 to The volume level corresponding to M4 is, for example, the same as the hall set value T3. Regarding the hole setting value T2, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum stage player setting value M1 is 15, the volume level corresponding to the maximum stage player setting value M5 is 55, and the other player setting values M2 to The volume level corresponding to M4 is, for example, the same as the hall set value T3. In the case of the hole set values T0 to T2, the initial position is set to the minimum M1, for example.

Further, in the present embodiment, the volume level at the time of outputting the error sound corresponds to the hall set value at that time regardless of the player set value by the volume control means 39, as in the second and third embodiments. The maximum volume level to be set (here, the volume level corresponding to the player setting value M5 at the maximum stage) is set.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the initial position is different for each hole set value as shown in FIG. 55, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the second volume adjustment knob 140 is displayed. Similar to the embodiment, both the volume and the volume adjustment notification image PV change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 56A to 56E, the hole setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M1 (initial position), and the hole setting value is displayed while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed. When is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes sequentially in the order of 20 → 30 → 40 → 50 → 80 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value, and the volume is adjusted. Similarly, the broadcast image PV changes sequentially in the order of PV1 → PV2 → PV3 → PV4 → PV5 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

As described above, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the first instep value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (instep operating means) 140, and by operating the volume operating means (instep operating means) 39. When the first B value (for example, M1) is selected, the first predetermined value (for example, 20) is set, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected, and the second B value is larger than the first B value. When a value (for example, M2) is selected, a second predetermined value (for example, 30) is set, a second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and a first B value (for example, M1) is selected. 3 When a predetermined value (for example, 20) is set, a second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and a second B value (for example, M2) is selected, a fourth predetermined value (for example, 30) is set, and the second 1 The predetermined value and the third predetermined value are the same, the second predetermined value and the fourth predetermined value are the same, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected, and the upper limit B value (for example, M5) at that time is set. When selected, the first upper limit predetermined value (for example, 60) is set, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and the upper limit B value (for example, M5) at that time is selected. Since the upper limit predetermined value (for example, 65) is set and the first upper limit value and the second upper limit value are different, the upper limit value of the volume adjustable range can be changed by operating the volume adjustment knob 140. It is possible.

Further, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the first instep value (for example, T3) is selected by the operation of the volume adjustment knob (instep operation means) 140, and the first by the operation of the volume control means (B operation means) 39. When the upper limit B value (for example, M5) is selected, the first upper limit predetermined value (for example, 60) is set, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected, and 1 than the first upper limit B value (for example, M5). When the first B value (for example, M4) that is step smaller is selected, the first predetermined value (for example, 50) is set, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and the second upper limit B value (for example, M5) is set. When selected, the second upper limit predetermined value (65) is set, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and the second upper limit B value (for example, M4) is one step smaller than the second upper limit B value (for example, M5). ) Is selected, a second predetermined value (for example, 50) is set, the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value are the same, and the first upper limit predetermined value is from the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. Is also large and smaller than the second upper limit predetermined value.

Further, as in the present embodiment, the minimum value corresponding to the hall set value (specific A value) T3 to T7 in the normal mode among the volume levels corresponding to the maximum player set value (B value) is one step higher than the maximum. It is desirable, but not limited to, to set the volume level corresponding to the player setting value below to be equal to or higher than the maximum value corresponding to the hole setting value (specific instep value) T3 to T7 in the normal mode. ..

In this embodiment, the drawings corresponding to FIGS. 51 and 52 in the second embodiment are omitted, but as in the second embodiment, when the hall set value is set to T7 (first selection value). And, in either case where the hall setting value is set to T3 (second selection value), when the player setting value is set to M1 (first volume setting value), the volume of the normal sound effect On the other hand, the volume of the specific sound effect is large, and the volume of the specific sound effect is easier to hear than the normal sound effect. Further, in both the case where the hole set value is set to T7 (first selection value) and the case where the hole setting value is set to T3 (second selection value), the player set value is M5 (first selection value). When it is set to (2 volume setting values), the volume of the specific sound effect is smaller than the volume of the normal sound effect, and the volume of the specific sound effect is difficult to hear with respect to the normal sound effect.

57 and 58 exemplify the fifth embodiment of the present invention, and show an example in which the fourth embodiment is partially modified so that the initial position of each hole setting value in the volume level setting table is the same. There is.

The volume level setting table (FIG. 57) of the present embodiment differs from the volume level setting table (FIG. 55) of the fourth embodiment only in the initial position. That is, in the volume level setting table (FIG. 57) of the present embodiment, all the hole setting values T1 to T9 except when there is no sound, and the initial position is set to M5 corresponding to the maximum volume level. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the fourth embodiment, the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall set value at that time (here, the player) regardless of the player set value by the volume operating means 39. The volume level corresponding to the set value M5) is set.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the initial position with respect to each hole set value is the same, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume is the same as in the third embodiment. The level changes, but the volume adjustment notification image PV does not change (except when the volume adjustment knob 140 is changed from the initial position at the time of operation). For example, as shown in FIGS. 58 (a1) and 58 (b) to (e), the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed with the hole set value set to T3 and the player set value set to M5 (initial position). When the hole setting value is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes sequentially in the order of 60 → 65 → 70 → 75 → 80 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value. However, the volume adjustment notification image PV remains PV5 and does not change. However, if the player setting value is changed to, for example, M1 when the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T3 to T4, not only the volume but also the volume adjustment notification image is shown as shown in FIGS. 58 (a2) → (b). PV also changes.

When the initial position for each hole set value is the same as in the present embodiment, the initial position does not have to be a value corresponding to the maximum volume level. Further, the initial positions may be the same for some of the hole set values (for example, the hole set values T3 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the power saving mode), and the initial values of the other hole set values may be different.

59 to 61, 61-1 and 61-2 illustrate the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and the second embodiment is partially modified to at least a part of the holes in the volume level setting table. For the set value, the volume level corresponding to each player set value is common to at least some hole set values, but the maximum volume is set by making the range of the player set value different among those hole set values. An example of different levels is shown.

The volume level setting table (FIG. 59) of the present embodiment corresponds to the 10-step hole setting value of T0 to T9 by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the 10-step player setting value of M1 to M10 by the volume control means 39. Although the volume level assignment is set, the range that the player setting value can take is different for each hole setting value. Further, as in the second embodiment, the hall set values T0 are for silence, T1 is for presentation, T2 is for factory shipment, T3 to T7 are for normal mode, and T8 and T9 are for power saving mode.

For the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the volume levels corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M10 are all the same, for example, the volume level 5 corresponding to the minimum player setting value M1 to the maximum player setting. The volume level 86 corresponding to the value M10 is changed by a predetermined step value (here, 9).

On the other hand, regarding the range in which the player set value can be taken, the upper limit differs for each of the hole set values T3 to T7, and the lower limit is common. That is, the lower limit of the range that the player set value can take is M1 for all of the hole set values T3 to T7, while the upper limit of the range that the player set value can take is M6 for each of the hole set values T3 to T7. It is ~ M10. As a result, the upper limit of the volume level in the case of the hall set values T3 to T7 is 50, 59, 68, 77, 86, respectively, and the larger the hall set value, the larger the upper limit of the volume level.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume level corresponding to each player setting value is common for each of the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, and the upper limit of the range that the player setting value can take is different. Therefore, it is possible to change the upper limit of the adjustable range of the volume level by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, and even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is changed, it is unlikely that a player feels uncomfortable when adjusting the volume. There is an advantage.

In the present embodiment, the initial position corresponding to the hole set values T3 to T7 for the normal mode is set to the upper limit of the range that the player set value can take. That is, as shown in FIG. 59, the initial positions in the case of the hole set values T3 to T7 are M6 to M10, respectively, and the larger the hole set value, that is, the larger the upper limit of the volume level, the more the initial position. Is also large.

The hole setting value T8 for the power saving mode is the same as the hole setting value T3 having the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, for example. Further, the hole setting value T9 for the power saving mode is set to be the same as the hole setting value T7 having the largest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, for example. The same applies to the initial position.

Further, regarding the hole set value T0, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M10 are all 0 (silence). Regarding the hole set value T1, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M10 are all the same as in the case of the hole set values T3 to T7, and the upper limit of the range that the player set value can take is, for example, the hole set value T3. It is the same M6 as in the case of. Regarding the hole set value T2, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M10 are all the same as in the case of the hole set values T3 to T7, and the upper limit of the range that the player set value can take is, for example, the hole set value T4. It is the same M7 as in the case of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the volume level at the time of outputting the error sound is set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall set value at that time regardless of the player set value by the volume operating means 39.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the range of the player set value is different for each hole set value, the volume adjustment notification image PV is also different from the second to fifth embodiments. That is, as shown in FIG. 60, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the present embodiment includes, for example, a plurality of (here, 10) volume display figures 151 to 160 corresponding to the maximum range M1 to M10 of the player set value. There is. The volume display figures 151 to 160 are formed in a vertical band shape having a length corresponding to, for example, a player set value, and are arranged in the left-right direction with the lower end sides aligned, for example.

The volume display figures 151 to 160 can be displayed in three display modes, for example, "white", "solid", and "gray out", respectively. For example, the volume is displayed regardless of the range of the player setting value. All of the figures 151 to 160 are displayed in any of the three display modes. That is, as shown in FIG. 60, among the volume display figures 151 to 160, the volume display figures corresponding to the outside of the range that the player set value can take (for example, in the case of the hall set value T3, correspond to the player set values M7 to M10). The volume display figures 157 to 160) are displayed in "gray out", and among the other volume display figures, a predetermined number of display modes (for example, a game) are displayed from the volume display figure 151 side according to the player setting value at that time. In the case of the person set value M3, the volume display figures 151 to 153) are set to "solid paint", and the others (for example, the volume display figures 154 to 156) are set to "white". With such a volume adjustment notification image PV, not only the volume setting status (first information) by the player operation, but also the range (first information) that the player setting value can take at that time and its maximum range (third). Information) and can be notified. It is not necessary to display the volume display figure corresponding to the range outside the range that the player setting value can take. In the following description, the volume adjustment notification image PV is distinguished as PVαβ by using a value α indicating a possible range of the player set value and a value β indicating the player set value at that time. For example, the volume adjustment notification image to be displayed when the range of the player setting value is M1 to M6 and the player setting value is M3 is the volume adjustment notification image PV63 with α = 6 and β = 3, for example, the player setting. The volume adjustment notification image to be displayed when the range in which the value can be taken is M1 to M10 and the player set value is M10 is the volume adjustment notification image PVAA with α = A and β = A.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, both the volume level and the volume adjustment notification image PV change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 61A to 61E, the hole setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M6 (initial position), and the hole setting value is displayed while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed. Is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes sequentially in the order of 50 → 59 → 68 → 77 → 86 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value, and the volume is adjusted. The broadcast image PV also changes in the order of PV66 → PV77 → PV88 → PV99 → PVAA according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hole set value.

As described above, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the first instep value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (instep operating means) 140, and by operating the volume operating means (B) operating means 39. When the first B value (for example, M1) is selected, the first predetermined value (for example, 5) is set, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected, and the second B value is larger than the first B value. When a value (for example, M2) is selected, a second predetermined value (for example, 14) is set, a second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and a first B value (for example, M1) is selected. 3 When a predetermined value (for example, 5) is set, a second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and a second B value (for example, M2) is selected, a fourth predetermined value (for example, 14) is set, and the second When the 2nd instep value (for example, T4) is selected and the 3rd B value (for example, M7) which is larger than the 2nd B value is selected, the 5th predetermined value (for example, 59) is set and the 1st predetermined value is set. (For example, 5) and the third predetermined value (for example, 5) are made the same, the second predetermined value (for example, 14) and the fourth predetermined value (for example, 14) are made the same, and the third predetermined value (for example, M7) is set. Since it is not included in the first selection range (for example, M1 to M6) that can be selected when the first instep value (for example, T3) is selected, the player can operate the volume adjustment knob 140 on the game hall side. It is possible to change the adjustable range of the volume level by. Moreover, since the upper limit of the player setting value (B value) that can be selected by the operation of the volume control means (B operation means) 39 is different between the hall set values (specific A value) T3 to T7 in the normal mode, the volume is increased. It is possible to change the upper limit of the adjustable range of the volume level by operating the adjustment knob 140.

61-1 and 61-2 are obtained by modifying FIG. 34 in the first embodiment according to the present embodiment, and the hall set value by the volume adjusting knob (second operating means) 140 is set to the volume level. FIG. 61-1 also shows the change in volume when the player setting value by the volume control means (first operation means) 39 is set to M1 to M10 when the upper limit value is set to T7, which is the maximum value. FIG. 61-2 shows a change in volume when the player set value is set to M1 to M6 when the hole set value is set to T3, which minimizes the upper limit of the volume level. As shown in FIG. 59, when the hall setting value is set to T3, the range in which the volume level can be changed by the volume control means 39 is 5 (first level) to 50 (second level) (second changeable). The range), and the range in which the volume level can be changed by the volume control means 39 when the hall setting value is set to T7 is 5 (first level) to 86 (third level) (first changeable range). It has become. Further, the volume corresponding to the volume level 5 to 86 in FIG. 61-1 is set to be common to the volume corresponding to the volume level 3 to 7 in FIG. 34.

As is clear from FIGS. 61-1 and 61-2, when the player setting value is set to M2 (volume level 14) or less, the volume of the specific sound effect is larger than the volume of the normal sound effect. While the volume of the specific sound effect is easier to hear than the normal sound effect, when the player setting value is set to M3 (volume level 23) or higher, the specific sound is set with respect to the volume of the normal sound effect. The volume of the production is low, making it difficult to hear the volume of the specific sound production compared to the normal sound production.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume level of the normal sound effect is set to 5 (first level), 50 (second level), which is louder than that, and the volume level is higher than that, which is arranged on the front side of the main body. A volume control means (first operation means) 39 that can change the volume level to change to a large 86 (third level), and a range in which the volume level can be changed by the volume control means 39 located on the rear side of the main body. A volume adjustment knob (second operating means) 140 that can switch the changeable range for switching is provided, and the changeable range that can be switched by the changeable range switching operation is set to the hall set value T7. The first changeable range including 5, 50 (second level) and 86 (third level), and 5 (first level) and 50 (first level) and 50 (when set to the hole set value T3). When the volume level of the normal sound effect is set to 5 (first level) including the second changeable range including 86 (third level) including the second level), the volume of the normal sound effect is set. On the other hand, the volume of the specific sound effect becomes easier to hear, and when the volume level of the normal sound effect is set to 50 (second level) or 86 (third level), the specific sound is compared with the volume of the normal sound effect. The volume of the production is configured to be difficult to hear.

62 and 63 illustrate the seventh embodiment of the present invention, and show an example in which the sixth embodiment is partially modified so that the initial position of each hole setting value in the volume level setting table is the same. There is.

The volume level setting table (FIG. 62) of the present embodiment differs from the volume level setting table (FIG. 59) of the sixth embodiment only in the initial position. That is, in the volume level setting table (FIG. 62) of the present embodiment, any one of the player setting values (here, M1 to M6) that can be selected from all the hole setting values among the player setting values M1 to M10. For example, M6, which is the maximum value, is set as the initial position. As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the volume level is different for each hole set value, but the volume level corresponding to the initial position is the same for all the hole set values except silence.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the initial position with respect to each hole set value is the same, if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV changes. The volume level does not change (unless it has been changed from the initial position when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated). For example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a1), (b) to (e1), the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed with the hole set value set to T3 and the player set value set to M6 (initial position). When the hole setting value is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume adjustment notification image PV changes in the order of PV66 → PV76 → PV86 → PV96 → PVA6, but the volume level corresponds to each setting position. It remains at 50 and does not change. However, if the player setting value is changed to, for example, M1 when the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T3 to T4, not only the volume adjustment notification image PV but also the volume adjustment notification image PV as shown in FIGS. 63 (a2) → (b) The volume level also changes.

Similarly, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (e1), (d) to (a1), the volume adjustment notification image PV is set to T7 as the hole set value and M6 (initial position) as the player set value. If the hole setting value is changed in the order of T7 → T6 → T5 → T4 → T3 during the display of, the volume adjustment notification image PV changes in the order of PVA6 → PV96 → PV86 → PV76 → PV66, but the volume level is set for each setting. It remains at 50, which corresponds to the position. However, if the player setting value is changed to, for example, M10 when the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T7 to T6, not only the volume adjustment notification image PV but also the volume adjustment notification image PV as shown in FIGS. 63 (e2) → (d). The volume level also changes.

FIG. 64 illustrates an eighth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the portion corresponding to the normal mode in the volume level setting table (FIG. 59) according to the sixth embodiment is extended to the entire volume level setting table. There is.

As shown in FIG. 64, the volume level setting table of the present embodiment has 10 levels of hole setting values T0 to T9 and 10 levels of player player setting values M1 to M10, and the hole setting values T0 to T9. All of them are for normal mode. Further, the volume levels corresponding to the player set values M1 to M10 are the same in all of the hall set values T0 to T9, for example, from the volume level 5 corresponding to the minimum player set value M1 to the maximum player set value M10. It changes by a predetermined step value (here, 9) up to the corresponding volume level 86.

On the other hand, regarding the range in which the player set value can be taken, the upper limit differs for each hole set value T0 to T9, and the lower limit is common. That is, the lower limit of the range that the player set value can take is M1 for all of the hole set values T0 to T9, while the upper limit of the range that the player set value can take is M1 for each of the hole set values T0 to T9. It is ~ M10. As a result, from the hole set value T0 to T9, the range of the corresponding player set value is widened by one step toward the upper limit value side, and the upper limit value of the corresponding volume level is also increased by a predetermined step value (here, 9). There is.

Further, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the initial position corresponding to the hole set values T0 to T9 is set to the upper limit of the range that the player set value can take. That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the initial positions in the case of the hole set values T0 to T9 are M1 to M10, respectively, and the larger the hole set value, that is, the larger the upper limit of the volume level, the more the initial position. Is also large.

Further, the volume level at the time of outputting the error sound is also set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall set value at that time regardless of the player set value by the volume operating means 39.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume level and the volume adjustment notification image PV are the same as in the case of the sixth embodiment (FIG. 61). And change together.

FIG. 65 exemplifies the ninth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the initial position in the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment is common to all the hole setting values.

In the volume level setting table (FIG. 65) of the present embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hall set values T0 to T9 are all common, and are set to M1 which is the lower limit of the range that the player set value can take. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment, the hall setting at that time is not limited to the player setting value by the volume control means 39. Set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the value.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV changes as in the case of the seventh embodiment (FIG. 63). However, the volume level does not change (except when the volume adjustment knob 140 is changed from the initial position at the time of operation).

66 and 67 illustrate the tenth embodiment of the present invention, and set the initial position in the volume level setting table (FIGS. 64 and 65) according to the eighth and ninth embodiments in one or a plurality of holes. An example is shown that is common to all hole setting value groups composed of values.

In the volume level setting table (FIGS. 66 and 67) of the present embodiment, a plurality of hole setting value groups composed of one or a plurality of continuous hole setting values are formed, and the initial position is set for each of the hole setting value groups. It is common, and for example, the smallest value among the upper limit values of the player set values in each hole set value group is adopted as the initial position. For example, in the case of the volume level setting table shown in FIG. 66, three hole setting value groups of T0 to T2, T3 to T5, and T6 to T9 are formed, and the initial position of each hole setting value group is, for example, M1, M4. It is set to M7. Similarly, in the case of the volume level setting table shown in FIG. 67, three hole setting value groups of T0 to T4, T5 to T8, and T9 are formed, and the initial position of each hole setting value group is, for example, M1, M6. It is set to M10.

Further, regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the volume level setting table (FIGS. 64 and 65) according to the 8th and 9th embodiments, regardless of the player setting value by the volume control means 39. , The maximum volume level corresponding to the hall setting value at that time is set.

It should be noted that the setting of the initial position as in this embodiment can be applied to all the embodiments described above or below.

FIG. 68 illustrates the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which a power saving mode and a silent mode are added to the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68, the volume level setting table of the present embodiment has 16 levels of hole setting values of T0 to TF and 10 levels of player set values of M1 to M10, and hole setting values T0 to T9. Is for normal mode, TA to TE are for power saving mode, and TF is for silence. The settings for the normal mode are the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment.

The hole setting value TA for the power saving mode (small) is, for example, the same as the hole setting value T0 having the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. Regarding the hole setting value TB for the power saving mode (middle), for example, among the hole setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode, the upper limit of the volume level is set to be the same as the hole setting value T5 which is substantially in the middle. .. The hole setting value TC for the power saving mode (large) is the same as the hole setting value T9 having the largest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode, for example.

Further, in the volume level setting table of the present embodiment, the hall setting value TD for the power saving mode (medium) and the hall setting value TE for the power saving mode (large) are provided separately from the hall setting values TB and TC. The hole setting values TD and TE are different from the hole setting values TB and TC only in the initial position, and the initial position corresponding to the hole setting values TB and TC is set as the upper limit of the range that the player setting value can take. However, the initial position corresponding to the hole set values TD and TE is set to the lower limit of the range that the player set value can take.

In this way, a plurality of hole setting values having a common range of possible player setting values may be provided, and the initial position may be different for each of the hole setting values.

FIG. 69 illustrates a twelfth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which a power saving mode and a silent mode are added to the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 69, the volume level setting table of the present embodiment has 16 levels of hole setting values of T0 to TF and 10 levels of player set values of M1 to M10, and hole setting values T0 to T9. Is for normal mode, TA to TE are for power saving mode, and TF is for silence. The settings for the normal mode are the same as those of the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 64 and 68) according to the eighth and eleventh embodiments.

The hole setting value TA for the power saving mode (small) is, for example, the same as the hole setting value T0 having the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. The hole setting value TE for the power saving mode (MAX) is the same as the hole setting value T9 having the largest upper limit of the volume level among the hole setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode, for example. Furthermore, for the hole setting values TB, TC, and TD for the power saving mode (medium), (large), and (extra large), three hole setting values T2 and T5 selected from the hole setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode at approximately equal intervals. , T7 has the same settings.

FIG. 70 exemplifies the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the initial position in the volume level setting table (FIG. 69) according to the twelfth embodiment is common to all the hall setting values.

In the volume level setting table (FIG. 70) of the present embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hall set values T0 to T9 are all common, and are set to M1 which is the lower limit of the range that the player set value can take. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the volume level setting table (FIG. 69) according to the twelfth embodiment, the hall setting at that time is not limited to the player setting value by the volume control means 39. Set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the value.

FIG. 71 illustrates the 14th embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the second embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds. In the second to thirteenth embodiments described above, the maximum volume level in each hole set value is used for the output of the error sound (and the specific notification sound), but in the present embodiment, the volume for the normal game sound is used. A volume level setting table for error sounds is provided separately from the level setting table. In the following description, the volume level of the normal game sound other than the error sound (and the specific notification sound) is referred to as "normal volume level", and the volume level of the error sound (and the specific notification sound) is referred to as "error volume level".

FIG. 71A is a volume level setting table used for outputting a normal game sound in the present embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment except for the setting for the error sound. ..

FIG. 71 (b) is the first example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 71 (a). In the example of FIG. 71 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 71 (a) and is the maximum volume level (here, the maximum volume level). It is set to a value that does not exceed 31). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hole set value T3 is 15, the error volume level corresponding to the hole set value T3 is set to 18 which is larger than that, and corresponds to the hole set value T7. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 31, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hole setting value T7 is set to 31, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 71 (c) is a second example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 71 (a). In the example of FIG. 71 (c), as in FIG. 71 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 71 (a). Therefore, it is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (31 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (6 in this case) except when there is no sound is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is used. It is smaller (or less) than, for example, the maximum value (here, 7) among the volume level differences for each step. It should be noted that the fluctuation range of the error volume level excluding the case of silence is smaller than the minimum value (here, 3) of the volume level difference for one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal volume level (may be less than or equal to). You may.

FIG. 71 (d) is a third example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 71 (a). In the example of FIG. 71 (d), the hole setting values T3 to T7 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into two upper and lower groups, and the error volume level corresponding to the lower hole setting values T3 and T4 is the upper limit of the normal volume level. As a value, the error volume level corresponding to the upper hole setting values T5 to T7 is set to the maximum volume level. In the example of FIG. 71 (d), the error volume levels corresponding to the hole setting values (excluding silence) T1, T2, T8, and T9 other than the normal mode are all set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 71 (e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 71 (b) to 71 (d) may be used as the volume level setting table for the error sound in this case, and the maximum volume level in each hole setting value is set as the error volume as in the second embodiment. It may be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 71 (e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

The volume level setting table shown in FIGS. 71 (b) to 71 (e) can be similarly applied to the volume level setting table (FIG. 53) according to the third embodiment.

FIG. 72 illustrates a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which a fourth embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 72A is a volume level setting table used for outputting a normal game sound in the present embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 55) of the fourth embodiment except for the setting for the error sound. ..

FIG. 72 (b) is the first example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 72 (a). In the example of FIG. 72 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 72 (a) and is the maximum volume level (here, the maximum volume level). It is set to a value that does not exceed 80). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hole set value T3 is 60, the error volume level corresponding to the hole set value T3 is set to 72, which is larger than that, and corresponds to the hole set value T7. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 80, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hole setting value T7 is set to 80, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 72 (c) is a second example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 72 (a). In the example of FIG. 72 (c), as in FIG. 72 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 72 (a). Therefore, it is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (80 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (8 in this case) except when there is no sound is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is used. It is smaller (or less) than, for example, the minimum value (10 in this case) of the volume level difference for each step. It should be noted that the fluctuation range of the error volume level excluding the case of silence is smaller than the maximum value (20 in this case) of the volume level difference for one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal volume level (may be less than or equal to). You may.

FIG. 72 (d) is a third example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 72 (a). In the example of FIG. 72 (d), the hole setting values T3 to T7 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into two upper and lower groups, and the error volume level corresponding to the lower hole setting values T3 and T4 is the upper limit of the normal volume level. As a value, the error volume level corresponding to the upper hole setting values T5 to T7 is set to the maximum volume level. In the example of FIG. 72 (d), the error volume levels corresponding to the hole setting values (excluding silence) T1, T2, T8, and T9 other than the normal mode are all set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 72 (e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 72 (b) to 72 (d) may be used as the volume level setting table for the error sound in this case, and the maximum volume level in each hole setting value is set as the error volume as in the fourth embodiment. It may be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 72 (e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

The volume level setting table shown in FIGS. 72 (b) to 72 (e) can be similarly applied to the volume level setting table (FIG. 57) according to the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 73 illustrates the 16th embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the 6th embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 73A is a volume level setting table used for outputting a normal game sound in the present embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 59) of the sixth embodiment except for the setting for the error sound. ..

FIG. 73 (b) is the first example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 73 (a). In the example of FIG. 73 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 73 (a) and is the maximum volume level (here, the maximum volume level). It is set to a value that does not exceed 86). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hole set value T3 is 50, the error volume level corresponding to the hole set value T3 is set to 59, which is larger than that, and corresponds to the hole set value T7. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 86, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hole setting value T7 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 73 (c) is a second example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 73 (a). In the example of FIG. 73 (c), as in FIG. 73 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 73 (a). Therefore, it is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (86 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (6 in this case) except when there is no sound is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is used. It is smaller (or less) than the volume level difference (9 in this case) for each step.

FIG. 73 (d) is a third example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 73 (a). In the example of FIG. 73 (d), the hole setting values T3 to T7 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into two upper and lower groups, and the error volume level corresponding to the lower hole setting values T3 and T4 is the upper limit of the normal volume level. As a value, the error volume level corresponding to the upper hole setting values T5 to T7 is set to the maximum volume level. In the example of FIG. 73 (d), the error volume levels corresponding to the hole setting values (excluding silence) T1, T2, T8, and T9 other than the normal mode are all set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 73 (e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 73 (b) to 73 (d) may be used as the volume level setting table for the error sound in this case, and the maximum volume level in each hole setting value is set as the error volume as in the sixth embodiment. It may be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 73 (e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

The volume level setting table shown in FIGS. 73 (b) to 73 (e) can be similarly applied to the volume level setting table (FIG. 62) according to the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 74 illustrates the 17th embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the 8th embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 74A is a volume level setting table used for outputting a normal game sound in the present embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) of the eighth embodiment except for the setting for the error sound. ..

FIG. 74 (b) is the first example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 74 (a). In the example of FIG. 74 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 74 (a) and is the maximum volume level (here, the maximum volume level). It is set to a value that does not exceed 86). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hole set value T0 is 5, the error volume level corresponding to the hole set value T0 is set to 14 which is larger than that, and corresponds to the hole set value T9. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 86, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hole setting value T9 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 74 (c) is a second example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 74 (a). In the example of FIG. 74 (c), as in FIG. 74 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 74 (a). Although it is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (86 in this case), the volume level for one step of the player setting value when the fluctuation range of the error volume level (9 in this case) is the normal volume level. The difference (here, 9) or less. The fluctuation range of the error volume level may be smaller than the volume level difference of one step of the player set value in the case of the normal volume level.

FIG. 74 (d) is a third example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 74 (a). In the example of FIG. 74 (d), the hole setting values T0 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into two upper and lower groups, and the error volume level corresponding to the lower hole setting values T0 to T2 is the upper limit of the normal volume level. As a value, the error volume level corresponding to the upper hole set values T3 to T9 is set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 74 (e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 74 (b) to 74 (d) may be used as the volume level setting table for the error sound in this case, and the maximum volume level in each hole setting value is set as the error volume as in the eighth embodiment. It may be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 74 (e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level.

The volume level setting table shown in FIGS. 74 (b) to 74 (e) can be similarly applied to the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 65 to 67) according to the ninth and tenth embodiments. ..

FIG. 75 illustrates an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the eleventh embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 75A is a volume level setting table used for outputting a normal game sound in the present embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 68) of the eleventh embodiment except for the setting for the error sound. ..

FIG. 75 (b) is the first example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 75 (a). In the example of FIG. 75 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 75 (a) and is the maximum volume level (here, the maximum volume level). It is set to a value that does not exceed 86). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hole set value T0 is 5, the error volume level corresponding to the hole set value T0 is set to 14 which is larger than that, and corresponds to the hole set value T9. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 86, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hole setting value T9 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 75 (c) is a second example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 75 (a). In the example of FIG. 75 (c), as in FIG. 75 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 75 (a). Therefore, it is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (86 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (9 in this case) except when there is no sound is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is used. The volume level difference for each step (9 in this case) or less. The fluctuation range of the error volume level except for the case of silence may be smaller than the volume level difference of one step of the player set value in the case of the normal volume level.

FIG. 75 (d) is a third example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 75 (a). In the example of FIG. 75 (d), the hole setting values T0 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the hole setting values TA to TE corresponding to the power saving mode are divided into two upper and lower groups, respectively, and correspond to the lower hole setting values. The error volume level to be performed is set to the upper limit of the normal volume level, and the error volume level corresponding to the upper hole setting value is set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 75 (e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. Any one of FIGS. 75 (b) to 75 (d) may be used as the volume level setting table for the error sound in this case, and the maximum volume level in each hole setting value is set as the error volume as in the eleventh embodiment. It may be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 75 (e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

FIG. 76 illustrates the 19th embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the 12th embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 76A is a volume level setting table used for outputting a normal game sound in the present embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 69) of the twelfth embodiment except for the setting for the error sound. ..

FIG. 76 (b) is the first example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 76 (a). In the example of FIG. 76 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 76 (a) and is the maximum volume level (here, the maximum volume level). It is set to a value that does not exceed 86). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hole set value T0 is 5, the error volume level corresponding to the hole set value T0 is set to 14 which is larger than that, and corresponds to the hole set value T9. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 86, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T9 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 76 (c) is a second example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 76 (a). In the example of FIG. 76 (c), as in FIG. 76 (b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hole set values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hole set value in FIG. 76 (a). Therefore, it is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (86 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (9 in this case) except when there is no sound is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is used. The volume level difference for each stage (here, 9) or less. The fluctuation range of the error volume level except for the case of silence may be smaller than the volume level difference of one step of the player set value in the case of the normal volume level.

FIG. 76 (d) is a third example of the volume level setting table for the error sound corresponding to FIG. 76 (a). In the example of FIG. 76 (d), the hole setting values T0 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the hole setting values TA to TE corresponding to the power saving mode are divided into two upper and lower groups, respectively, and correspond to the lower hole setting values. The error volume level to be performed is set to the upper limit of the normal volume level, and the error volume level corresponding to the upper hole setting value is set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 76 (e) shows an example in which the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound is provided separately from the volume level setting table for the error sound. As the volume level setting table for the error sound in this case, any one of FIGS. 76 (b) to (d) may be used, and the maximum volume level in each hole setting value is set as the error volume as in the twelfth embodiment. It may be a level. In the volume level setting table for the specific notification sound shown in FIG. 76 (e), all the specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except when there is no sound.

The volume level setting table shown in FIGS. 76 (b) to 76 (e) can be similarly applied to the volume level setting table (FIG. 70) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

77 to 79 exemplify the twentieth embodiment of the present invention, and show an example in which the contents of the jackpot determination process (FIGS. 20 to 23) of the first embodiment are modified.

In the jackpot determination process of the first embodiment, the lower limit of the jackpot determination value, the upper limit of the low probability jackpot determination value, the upper limit of the high probability jackpot determination value, and the small hit determination in one jackpot determination table. The lower limit of the value, the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the big hit judgment random number are defined respectively, but in the big hit judgment process of the present embodiment, the low probability big hit judgment value, the high probability big hit judgment value, and the small hit Each range of judgment values is specified by a separate judgment table.

That is, in the jackpot determination process of the present embodiment, the low probability jackpot determination table, the high accuracy jackpot determination table, and the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 78 are used. Each of these determination tables is composed of lower limit value information for defining the lower limit value of each determination value and upper limit value information for defining the upper limit value. It is assumed that the ranges of the low probability jackpot determination value, the high probability jackpot determination value, and the small hit determination value in the present embodiment are exactly the same as those in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22).

The low-probability jackpot judgment table defines the range of jackpot judgment values at low probability. The lower limit value information is the lower limit value -1 of the low-probability jackpot judgment value, and the upper limit information is the low-probability jackpot. The upper limit of the judgment value is set respectively. Further, the range of the jackpot judgment value at the time of low probability is different for each set value (settings 1 to 6), but in this embodiment, the lower limit value is constant regardless of the set value, and the upper limit value is different for each set value. There is. Therefore, in the low probability jackpot determination table, only the upper limit value information of the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information is composed of six types of values corresponding to the settings 1 to 6.

The high-accuracy jackpot judgment table defines the range of jackpot determination values at high accuracy. The lower limit value information is the lower limit value -1 of the high-accuracy jackpot determination value, and the upper limit information is the high-accuracy jackpot. The upper limit of the judgment value is set respectively. Further, the range of the jackpot judgment value at the time of high accuracy is different for each set value (settings 1 to 6), but in this embodiment, the lower limit value is constant regardless of the set value, and the upper limit value is different for each set value. There is. Therefore, in the high-accuracy jackpot determination table, only the upper limit value information of the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information is composed of six types of values corresponding to the settings 1 to 6.

In the present embodiment, the lower limit of the low probability jackpot determination value and the lower limit of the high accuracy jackpot determination value are the same value (10000) (FIG. 22), but the low probability jackpot determination table and the high accuracy It is specified separately from the jackpot judgment table.

The small hit judgment table defines the range of the small hit judgment value, and the lower limit value -1 of the small hit judgment value is set in the lower limit value information, and the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value is set in the upper limit value information. ing. Since the range of the small hit determination value is common to all the set values (settings 1 to 6), both the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information are composed of one value in the small hit determination table.

Subsequently, the processing procedure of the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 77 will be described. In the jackpot determination process (FIG. 77), first, a jackpot determination random number is acquired (S161). Further, the address of the jackpot determination table corresponding to the probability state (low probability middle / high probability middle) at that time is acquired (S162), and the lower limit value information is acquired from the address (S163). For example, if the probability is low, the address of the low probability jackpot determination table is acquired, and the lower limit value -1 of the low probability jackpot determination value is acquired as the lower limit value information.

Next, the lower limit value information is compared with the jackpot determination random number value acquired in S161 (S164). If the jackpot determination random value is larger than the lower limit information (S165: Yes), the jackpot determination random value may be within the range of the jackpot determination value. The processing after S166 regarding the comparison of is executed. That is, after acquiring the set value data (any of 0 to 5) (S166), offsetting the set value data and changing the address (S167), the upper limit value information from that address, that is, when the probability is low or The upper limit of the jackpot determination value at the time of high accuracy is acquired (S168).

In the case of the low-accuracy / high-accuracy jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 78, six types of upper limit value information are provided corresponding to settings 1 to 6, so the set value data (0 to 5) acquired in S166. For example, if the setting is 1, the first upper limit value information is acquired at offset = 0, and if the setting is 6, the sixth upper limit value information is acquired at offset = 5 (S167, S168).

When the upper limit value information is acquired in S168, the value of the upper limit value information is compared with the jackpot determination random value acquired in S161 (S169). If the jackpot determination random value is equal to or less than the upper limit information (upper limit of the jackpot determination value at the time of low probability or high accuracy) (S170: Yes), the jackpot determination random number value is within the range of the jackpot determination value. Is confirmed, the jackpot determination result becomes a low-accuracy jackpot or a high-accuracy jackpot (FIG. 22), a jackpot determination flag corresponding to the jackpot determination result is set (S171), and the jackpot determination process ends. For example, if the big hit judgment result is a low probability big hit, 5AH is set in the low probability big hit flag and the high probability big hit flag, and if the big hit judgment result is a high probability big hit, only the high probability big hit flag is set. 5AH is set.

When it is determined in S165 that the jackpot determination random value is equal to or less than the lower limit information (S165: No), and in S170 it is determined that the jackpot determination random value is larger than the upper limit information (S170: No). Since it is determined that the jackpot determination random value is not within the range of the jackpot determination value, the processing after S172 regarding the jackpot determination is executed. That is, first, the address of the small hit determination table is acquired (S172), and the lower limit value information (lower limit value of the small hit determination value-1) is acquired from the address (S173).

Next, the lower limit value information is compared with the jackpot determination random value acquired in S161 (S174). Then, if the jackpot determination random value is equal to or less than the lower limit information (S175: No), it is determined that the jackpot determination random value is not within the range of either the jackpot determination value or the small hit determination value. It will be off and the jackpot judgment process will end as it is.

On the other hand, if the big hit judgment random value is larger than the lower limit value information (S175: Yes), the big hit judgment random value may be within the range of the small hit judgment value, so the upper limit information (from the following address). The upper limit value of the small hit determination value) is acquired (S176), and the value of the upper limit value information is compared with the large hit determination random number value acquired in S161 (S177).

If the jackpot determination random value is equal to or less than the upper limit information (upper limit of the small hit determination value) (S178: Yes), it is determined that the jackpot determination random value is within the range of the small hit determination value. The judgment result is a small hit (Fig. 22). For example, the small hit judgment flag is set to 5AH and the big hit judgment process is terminated, but the big hit judgment random value is larger than the upper limit information (upper limit value of the small hit judgment value). If (S178: No), it is determined that the jackpot determination random value is not within the range of either the jackpot determination value or the small hit determination value, so that the jackpot determination result is out of order and the jackpot determination process is terminated as it is. ..

By the way, the jackpot determination process (FIG. 77) of the present embodiment is not equipped with the setting change function (that is, the setting value is only one step) in the pachinko machine like the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20) of the first embodiment. Is also available. That is, in this embodiment, a program for jackpot determination processing is performed between a model in which the set value can be changed in a plurality of stages (there are multiple stages of the setting value) and a model in which the setting change function is not installed (the setting value is in one stage). Can be shared.

When the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 77 is executed on a model not equipped with the setting change function, the jackpot determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 79. The low-accuracy / high-accuracy jackpot determination table (for setting 1 step) shown in FIG. 79 is different from the low-accuracy / high-accuracy jackpot determination table (for setting 6 steps) shown in FIG. 78. Of the 6 types of upper limit information corresponding to, the upper limit information of the low probability / high probability jackpot judgment value is set in the upper limit information in the case of setting 1, and the upper limit information in the case of other settings 2 to 6. Is only the point where dummy data is set (shaded part in FIG. 79).

In the jackpot determination process (FIG. 77) of the present embodiment, the set value data (any of 0 to 5) is acquired (S166), the address is changed using the set value data as an offset (S167), and the address is changed. The upper limit value information is acquired from (S168), but in the case of a pachinko machine whose set value is only one step, 0 is set in the set value data, so in S168, offset = 0 is the first. Since the upper limit value information of is acquired, it is possible to normally execute the jackpot determination process.

Further, in the jackpot determination table (for setting 1 step) shown in FIG. 79, dummy data is set in the upper limit value information in the case of settings 2 to 6, so that the data size is the jackpot determination table (setting 6) shown in FIG. Same as (for stage).

In the above embodiments, the sound effects emitted from the gaming machine include a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the sound data and a second sound effect output when the driving means is driven. A volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the first sound effect to the first volume value or the second volume value whose output volume is larger than the first volume value is provided, and the output volume is set to the first volume value. , The output volume emitted from the game machine when only the first sound effect is executed, and the output emitted from the game machine when only the first sound effect is executed while the second volume value is set. The volume difference from the volume is defined as the first volume difference, and the output volume emitted from the gaming machine when the first sound effect and the second sound effect are executed in the state set to the first volume value. When the volume difference between the output volume and the output volume emitted from the game machine when the first sound effect and the second sound effect are executed in the state set to the second volume value is set as the second volume difference. The second volume difference is smaller than the first volume difference.

Further, as the sound effect emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the voice data and a second sound effect output when the driving means is driven, and the player operates the sound effect. When the first volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the first sound effect to the first volume value or the second volume value having a larger output volume than the first volume value, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. A second volume changing means for changing the output volume of the first sound effect to the second volume value is provided regardless of the operation of the player, and the first volume value is the output volume of the first sound effect. The output volume of the second sound effect is easy to hear, and the output volume of the second sound effect is difficult to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect at the second volume value. It is configured.

Further, in a display means capable of displaying a symbol variation game and a gaming machine that changes from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the symbol variation game becomes a specific mode.
As the voice effect emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the voice data and a second sound effect output when the driving means is driven, and the first sound effect is output by the operation of the player. The volume changing means that can change the output volume of one sound effect to any one of a plurality of types, and the special gaming state and the normal gaming state have different output volumes emitted from the gaming machine. In both the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, when the output volume is changed to the minimum by the volume changing means, the output volume of the second sound effect is heard with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect. It is easy to handle, and when it is changed to the maximum output volume by the volume changing means, the output volume of the second sound effect is configured to be difficult to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect. ing.

Further, in a game machine capable of performing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable game of the symbol becomes a specific mode, the sound output from the speaker is output from the speaker as a sound effect emitted from the game machine. There is a one-sound effect and a second sound effect that is output when the drive means is driven, and the output volume of the first sound effect can be changed to a plurality of set volumes by the operation of the player. As an effect of executing both the first sound effect and the second sound effect, the output volume of the first sound effect is relatively low with respect to the output volume of the second sound effect. When there is a specific effect and a second specific effect in which the output volume of the first sound effect is relatively high with respect to the output volume of the second sound effect, suggesting that the symbol may be in the specific mode. The first specific effect is executed, and the second specific effect is executed when notifying that the symbol is in the specific mode, and the first specific effect is better than the second specific effect in any of the second specific effects. When the output volume is changed to the minimum by the volume changing means, the output volume of the second sound effect is easy to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect, and the maximum output by the volume changing means. When the volume is changed, the output volume of the second sound effect is configured to be difficult to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect.

Further, as the sound effect emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the voice data and a second sound effect output when the driving means is driven, and there is a second sound effect output on the front side of the game machine. The output volume of the first sound effect is set to be larger than the first volume value or the first volume value by the operation of the player, and the output volume is larger than the second volume value or the second volume value. The volume changing means that can be changed to the third volume value, the volume changing range switching means that is arranged behind the game machine and can switch the output volume changing range by the volume changing means, and the volume changing range switching means. , The first volume change range including the first volume value, the second volume value, and the third volume value, and the second volume value including the first volume value and the second volume value and not including the third volume value. In the first volume value including the sound change range, the output volume of the second sound effect is easy to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect, and the second volume value or the third volume is easy to hear. In the value, the output volume of the second sound effect is configured to be difficult to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect.

Further, as the sound effect emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the voice data and a second sound effect output when the driving means is driven, and there is a second sound effect output on the front side of the game machine. A volume changing means that is arranged and can change the output volume of the first sound effect to a first volume value or a second volume value having a larger output volume than the first volume value by the operation of the player, and a game machine. The output volume selection means, which is arranged on the rear side and can select the output volume of the first volume value and the second volume value, and the output volume selection means are more than the first selection value and the first selection value. Among the output volumes of the first volume value and the second volume value, the second selection value in which the output volume of the second volume value is set to be small is included, and the said in the first selection value or the second selection value. In the first volume value, the output volume of the second sound effect is easy to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect, and in the first selection value or the second volume value in the second selection value, the output volume is easy to hear. The output volume of the second sound effect is configured to be difficult to hear with respect to the output volume of the first sound effect.

Further, as the sound effect emitted from the game machine, there are a first sound effect output from the speaker based on the sound data and a second sound effect output when the driving means is driven, and the first sound effect is described. The first volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the second sound effect and the second volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the second sound effect are provided, and the first volume changing means is executing the first sound effect. The output volume can be changed regardless of whether or not the output volume is changed, while the second volume changing means is configured to be able to change the output volume only during the execution of the second sound effect.

Further, a display means capable of displaying a symbol variation game, a sound means capable of outputting sound, a display effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined display effect by the display means, and a predetermined voice means. It is equipped with a sound effect executing means capable of executing a sound effect, and the display effect is composed of a series of moving images in which a plurality of scenes are connected, and the sound effect includes a first sound effect and a second sound effect. During the execution of the display effect, the voice effect executing means executes the second sound effect after a muffling period after the execution of the first sound effect, and the display effect executing means executes the voice. The means is configured to change the scene of the display effect at the timing of executing the second sound effect.

Further, in the display means capable of displaying the symbol variation game and the gaming machine in which the special gaming state is set to be advantageous to the player when the result of the symbol variation game becomes a specific aspect, the specific aspect is performed during the symbol variation. The specific notice can be executed, and the specific notice does not yet suggest the possibility of the specific mode when displayed on the display means, and after the first half section. There is a latter half section suggesting the possibility of the specific mode, and when the specific notice is executed, the voice output means capable of outputting the voice related to the specific notice is provided, and the voice output means is the first half. When the section is executed, the voice related to the specific notice is output at the first volume, and when the latter half section is executed, the voice related to the specific notice is output at the second volume higher than the first volume. It is configured.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, in the example of FIG. 33, the generation timing and the generation period of the vibration sound are the same as the “collision change sound”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the vibration sound may be generated before the "color change", for example, at the time of "collision", or may be generated at the same timing as the "color change". Further, the vibration sound may be generated at the time of "arrow appearance", or may be generated at both the time of "arrow appearance" and the time of "collision" and / or "color change". When a vibration sound is generated both at the time of "arrow appearance" and at the time of "collision" and / or "color change", the vibration time at the time of "arrow appearance" is longer than that at the time of "collision" and / or "color change". Each vibration pattern may be different, such as making it shorter (or longer).

Further, the appearance sound may have different types and / or output volumes depending on the changing color of the hold (reliability to be derived). Further, when a plurality of types of appearing sounds and / or output volumes are provided in this way, the ease of hold change (whether or not a predetermined reliability is derived, that is, the effect of the effect) is made according to the output sound. The degree of success) may be different. As a result, it is possible to expect a subsequent result according to the appearance sound at the time of appearance, and it can be used as a mechanism for further capturing the player's eyes.

Further, when the output volume of the appearance sound is different, the balance of the output volume of the appearance sound, the fanning sound, and the collision change sound is the relationship shown in the explanation of FIG. 33 in all the appearance sounds having different output volumes. It is desirable to set. However, not limited to this, for example, when the reliability is relatively low (when the content of the derivation result is relatively low, or when a failure pattern that is not derived is selected), the output volume can be lowered to describe the above. The balance is different from the relationship of (for example, the volume of the appearing sound is made smaller than the fanning sound), and conversely, when the reliability is relatively high (the content of the derivation result is relatively high, or the derivation is performed). If the success pattern to be performed is selected, etc.), the output volume may be configured to have the balance described above. In that case, for example, (volume of appearance sound)> (volume of collision change sound or fanning sound) may be set. Since the content can be broadened, the interest of the advance notice production will be enhanced, and the player will be able to select the trigger for switching the line of sight at a more detailed timing. That is, for a known player, it is possible to switch the line of sight according to the success pattern without switching the line of sight as much as possible in the failure pattern. Further, these are not limited to the collision sound, but can be similarly applied to the fanning sound and the collision change sound. In that case, it may be applied to all of these sounds in the same manner, or it may be applied to any one or more sounds.

As described above, the volume relationship of the appearance sound, the fanning sound, and the collision change sound is not limited to (volume of the collision change sound)> (volume of the appearance sound)> (volume of the fanning sound) shown in FIG. 33. By making the volume of the appearance sound (first volume) higher than the volume of the collision change sound (second volume), for example, (volume of the appearance sound)> (volume of the fanning sound)> (volume of the collision change sound). Alternatively, (volume of collision change sound)> (volume of fanning sound)> (volume of appearance sound) may be used.

In the example of FIG. 33, the image of the arrow is displayed when the appearance sound is generated, but it is not necessary to completely match the sound output timing with the image display. For example, the image of the arrow is displayed when the appearance sound is generated. Instead, the image of the arrow may be displayed after the appearance sound is generated, or the image of the arrow may be displayed when the fanning sound is generated. By preceding the sound with the image in this way, it is possible to first switch the player's line of sight to the LCD screen by the sound, and then show the player the state of the image change corresponding to the sound. It is possible to attract more interest of the player who has changed his eyes.

Further, the output volume of the BGM may be lowered for at least a part of the pending change effect. As a result, it is possible to make the volume increasing effect such as the appearance sound, the fanning sound, the collision change sound, and the vibration sound more conspicuous, and to easily attract the attention of the player. In this case, the rate of decrease in the output volume of the BGM may be different between the first half section and the second half section of the production. For example, the rate of decrease in the output volume of the BGM may be smaller (the output volume of the BGM may be increased) in the latter half section than in the first half section, or vice versa. Further, if the rate of decrease in the output volume of the BGM is to be increased, the sound may be muted.

In the example of FIG. 33, the cut split of the image effect is not changed during the hold change effect, but the cut split may be changed in the middle. By changing the cut split according to the scene, it is possible to maximize the characteristics of each scene and to concentrate on the production without boring the player who has moved his eyes. In this case, the number of times the cut split is changed is arbitrary. For example, the cut split may be changed in each scene of arrow appearance, approach, and collision, one cut is set from the arrow appearance to the collision, and another is after the color change. It may be cut.

Further, the time allocation of each scene shown in FIG. 33 is arbitrary, and for example, the time of each of the arrow appearance scene, the approach scene, and the collision scene may be different. In this case, it is desirable to set (time of approach scene)> (time of collision scene)> (time of arrow appearance scene) as the time setting. This allows you to set a sufficient amount of time between taking the player's eyes and the result appearing, so that the player can organize the information in his or her mind from the time the player's eyes are taken until the result is derived. Time can be set. Further, (time of approach scene)> (time of arrow appearance scene)> (time of arrow collision scene) may be set, and the same effect can be exhibited in this case as well. Further, (time of the arrow appearance scene)> (time of the approaching scene)> (time of the arrow collision scene) may be set. In this case, a sufficient time can be set from the appearance scene of the arrow to the approaching scene (at the time of fanning), so that the same effect as described above can be exhibited here as well.

Further, a predetermined effect image may be provided for the image of the arrow (the image that promotes the pending change), that is, the image that is the target of the appearance sound. At that time, the effect image may be different for each scene, that is, at the time of appearance (appearance timing), at the time of fanning (during fanning), and at the time of collision change (collision timing or after collision). Further, the effect image may be configured on a different layer with image data different from the arrow image, or may be configured as one image of the arrow + effect. Further, the image from the appearance of the arrow to the collision or after the collision may be configured as a series of moving images. Further, with respect to the success pattern shown in FIG. 33, regarding the failure pattern (pending change failure pattern), a series of moving images from the appearance to the time when the arrow fades out to the edge of the screen without colliding with the arrow. It may be configured as. Further, the display mode of the arrow image and the effect image up to a predetermined time point before the collision may be substantially the same or different between the time of success and the time of failure. Further, depending on the type of the image up to a predetermined time point before the collision, a case where a success pattern is likely to occur and a case where a failure pattern is likely to occur may be provided.

The moving speed at the time of moving the image of the arrow (the image prompting the pending change) may be changed from the appearance to the collision. In this case, the movement speed at the time of appearance (when the appearance sound is generated) is slower than that at the time of appearance (when the appearance sound is generated), etc. The moving speed may be different. Of course, the moving speed at the time of fanning (when the fanning sound is generated) may be faster than at the time of appearance (when the appearing sound is generated). In addition, the movement speed at the time of collision (when collision sound is generated) is faster than that at the time of fanning (when fanning sound is generated). The speed may be different. Of course, the moving speed at the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated) may be slower than that at the time of the fanning (when the fanning sound is generated). In addition, it moves between the time of appearance (when the appearance sound is generated) and the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated), such as slowing the movement speed at the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated) than when it appears (when the appearance sound is generated). The speed may be different. Of course, the moving speed at the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated) may be faster than at the time of appearance (when the appearance sound is generated). Regarding the moving speed when moving the arrow image (image that encourages pending change), (at the time of appearance)> (at the time of collision)> (at the time of fanning) or (at the time of collision)> (at the time of appearance)> (at the time of fanning) It is desirable to have a relationship of time).

When the image of the arrow appears at the same time as or after the output of the appearance sound, the dynamic display can increase the attention to the production and the notice after the player's eyes are taken away. .. Similarly, when the collision change sound is generated, that is, at the timing of the hold change (reliability is disclosed), the hold image (image showing the reliability) after the change is displayed at the same time as or after the occurrence of the collision change sound. It is desirable to do. Further, although it is desirable to dynamically display the image of the arrow (the image that promotes the pending change), it may be statically displayed.

In the example of FIG. 33, the screen is toned down (visibility suppressed) during the period from the start of the effect (arrow appearance scene) to the approaching scene, but the end time of this tonedown is earlier than that (for example, the approaching start). It may be time) or after (for example, at the time of collision). Also, tone down does not have to be performed. Further, in the example of FIG. 33, the effect button 41 is configured to vibrate to generate a vibration sound when the collision change sound is output, but the vibration sound may not be generated.

In the hold change effect shown in FIG. 33, the image effect in which the arrow flies toward the hold image is executed as the hold change effect, but the hold change effect is not limited to this, and the character changes. The content is arbitrary, such as performing some action on the pending image of interest. As described above, even if the contents of the pre-holding change effect are different, the matters described with respect to FIGS. 33 and 34 described above can be similarly applied.

Further, FIGS. 33 and 34 have described the hold change effect as an example of the specific notice, but the specific notice is not limited to the hold change effect. The matters described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34 can be similarly applied to any specific notice other than the pending change effect.

In the embodiment, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 33 is exemplified as an effect for switching the line of sight of the player who enjoys using the smartphone during the game to the liquid crystal screen of the gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “a effect of stealing the line of sight”). However, as shown below, the production that steals the line of sight is not limited to this.

The reliability suggestion derived in the staging that steals the eyes may be configured so as to have a high possibility of becoming a premier result (reliability result suggesting / notifying that the fluctuation is a hit). For example, another effect of the same type as the effect that captures the line of sight (at least a part of the effect that is different from the effect that captures the line of sight, such as not outputting the appearance sound, for example, the effect that captures the line of sight is a pending change effect shown in FIG. 33. In the case of, the premier result may be configured to be more likely to be derived as compared with the pending change effect other than that shown in FIG. 33). Further, the execution ratio between the case where the reliability suggestion derived in the staging that steals the line of sight is the premier result and the case where it is not may be 100: 0. Of course, the staging that captures the line of sight is not limited to the hold change staging, but any staging, pseudo-ream staging, timer staging, conversation staging, reach tempai staging, movable body staging, SP reach development staging, etc. may be used. Also in these cases, the relationship between the staging that steals the line of sight, the staging that steals the line of sight, and other staging of the same type may be as described above.

It is desirable to perform the production that captures the line of sight when the expectation level has risen to some extent in the fluctuation range where the expectation level is relatively high, such as during the reach fluctuation during normal times. It is considered that the success probability of the eye movement is further increased by executing the effect of stealing the line of sight at the timing when the degree of interest in the player's effect and the notice is increasing in this way. For the same reason, even if the staging that steals the line of sight is executed before the transition from reach fluctuation to SP reach (specifically, before the title display of SP reach) or during SP reach. good. Similarly, the effect that steals the line of sight is such that the execution probability is higher after reach than during normal fluctuation (non-tempai state), and after SP reach or after SP reach is executed than after reach. It is desirable to configure it.

Further, the effect of stealing the line of sight may not be executed during the normal fluctuation (non-tempai state), but may be executed after the reach. Of course, on the contrary, the effect of stealing the line of sight may be performed during normal fluctuation (non-tempai state) and may not be performed after reach.

In addition, the effect of stealing the line of sight may be configured so that the execution probability is higher in the normal game state than in the special game state such as the probability change state, and the execution ratio in that case is 100: 0. You may. This is because the probabilistic state is already advantageous for the player, and it is highly possible that the player is already looking at the LCD screen. However, on the contrary, the effect of stealing the line of sight may be executed during the special gaming state such as the probabilistic state, and may not be executed during the normal gaming state.

In addition, the effect of stealing the line of sight may not be executed during the normal fluctuation (non-tempai state), but may be executed after the reach, or may not be executed during the special gaming state such as the probabilistic state, and is not executed during the normal gaming state. You may try to run it inside. Of course, on the contrary, the effect of stealing the line of sight may be executed during the normal fluctuation (non-tempai state) and not executed after the reach, or may be executed during the special gaming state such as the probabilistic state, and the normal gaming state. You may not do it inside.

The staging that captures the line of sight may be configured to be executed before the pseudo-continuous staging. As a result, the player who has shifted his / her eyes to the liquid crystal screen can continue to show the pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, for the effect that steals the line of sight, the execution probability may be higher before the pseudo-continuous effect than after the pseudo-continuous effect (more effects that take away the feasible line of sight), and the execution ratio in that case is 100: 0. May be. On the contrary, the production that steals the line of sight may have a lower execution probability (less the effect that steals the feasible line of sight) before the pseudo-ream effect than after the pseudo-ream effect, and the execution rate in that case is It may be 0: 100.

The effect that captures the eyes is more than performing other premier effects (effects that suggest that it is a hit) or rainbow effects (effects that make the lamp emit light with a specific light emission pattern that suggests that the fluctuation is a hit). May be configured to run before. As a result, the player who has moved his / her eyes to the LCD screen can continue to show the premiere effect and the rainbow effect. Further, as for the effect that captures the line of sight, the execution probability may be higher before the premier effect or the rainbow effect than after the effect, and the execution ratio in that case may be 100: 0. On the contrary, the execution probability of the staging that captures the line of sight may be lower before the premier staging or the rainbow staging than after the premier staging, and the execution ratio in that case may be 0: 100.

A plurality of staging effects that grab the line of sight may be configured to be executable during normal fluctuation (non-tempai state), after reach, during SP reach, and the like. In that case, the plurality of effects may be the same type of effect (each may be an effect related to a pending change), or may be different types of effects or notices. Further, in that case, the effect of stealing the line of sight may be executed a plurality of times with one fluctuation, or may be executed only once with one fluctuation. Further, the reliability may be higher in the case where the execution is performed a plurality of times with one variation than in the case where the execution is performed only once.

It is desirable to set the staging that steals the line of sight as a relatively reliable advance notice staging. For example, when the hold change effect is executed as an effect that steals the line of sight, it may be configured so that the content with high expectation (for example, red or more) can be easily derived as compared with other hold change effects. In addition, it is desirable to have the same configuration even when executing other notices as a production that steals the line of sight, not limited to the effect of holding change, and at the timing of stealing the line of sight, a relatively reliable production or It is desirable to carry out the notice.

When executing the same type of advance notice effect (here, pending change effect) as the effect that steals the line of sight at the timing before executing the effect that steals the line of sight, the content with relatively low expectation (for example, red or less) is It is desirable to configure it so that it can be easily derived.

The effect that is executed before the effect that captures the line of sight in one fluctuation is at least part of the effect that captures the line of sight with other effects of the same type as the effect that captures the line of sight (such as not outputting the appearance sound). If the effect is different and, for example, the effect that steals the line of sight is the hold change effect shown in FIG. 33, the hold change effect other than that shown in FIG. 33) may be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the direction and the notice different from each other before and after taking the line of sight, and to attract the player more effectively to the direction and the notice.

The operation effect such as the button effect may not be executed before the effect of stealing the line of sight, and the operation effect may be executed after the effect of stealing the line of sight. Since the operation effect is an effect that requires the player to operate a button, etc., it is unlikely that the player will respond to the operation even if the player suddenly executes the operation while the line of sight is facing the smartphone or the like, and a sufficient effect can be obtained. Because there isn't. Of course, the operation effect may be executed even before the effect that steals the line of sight. In this case, for example, it is desirable to configure the operation effect after the effect of taking the line of sight to be more reliable than the operation effect before the effect of taking the line of sight.

When the operation effect is executed even before the effect of stealing the line of sight, for example, in the operation effect before the effect of stealing the line of sight, the first operation effect (as an operation guidance image for encouraging the player to operate, the reliability is relatively relatively high. An operation effect using a low PUSH button image is likely to appear, and a second operation effect (also an operation effect using a relatively highly reliable pato button image as an operation guidance image) is used in the operation effect after the effect that steals the line of sight. (It may be an embodiment in which the shape of the button changes)) may be likely to appear. Further, in the operation effect before the effect of stealing the line of sight, only the first operation effect may appear, and in the operation effect after the effect of taking the line of sight, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may appear. It may be configured so that either one appears. As a result, only the first operation effect, which has a relatively low reliability, appears before the effect that steals the line of sight, so even if the player is absorbed in the smartphone and misses the operation effect, the effect is small, and conversely, the line of sight. Since it is unlikely that the player will overlook whether the first operation effect or the second operation effect, which has a relatively low reliability, will appear after the effect of robbing, the player feels nervous when performing the effect. You can enjoy it.

When executing an operation effect even before the effect that steals the line of sight, for example, the number of operation effects that can be executed after the effect that steals the line of sight is larger than the number of operation effects that can be executed before the effect that steals the line of sight. It is desirable to configure it in.

As an effect that captures the line of sight, an effect accompanied by an operation effect such as a button effect may be used. In this case, the operation effect may be executed after the appearance sound is output, or the collision change sound or the like may be output at a volume louder than, for example, the appearance sound at the timing when the player operates the operation means. You may.

In the staging that captures the eyes of the embodiment (FIG. 33), the sound output is used to attract the player's attention, but the present invention is not limited to this, but the lamp emission, vibration, ventilation, temperature change of a specific part, etc., or a combination thereof is not limited to this. It may be configured to attract the player's attention. In that case, similar to the relationship of sound output in the embodiment, the intensity of vibration, the wind speed, the temperature of a specific part, etc. are changed step by step such as at the time of appearance, at the time of fanning, and at the time of collision change. May be good. In that case, all the setting contents of the sound output related to the above-mentioned staging that steals the line of sight can be replaced with lamps, vibrations, blowers, temperature changes of specific parts, and the like.

The effect that captures the line of sight may be executed only once during one fluctuation, or may be executed a plurality of times. It is possible to increase the possibility that the player will notice such an effect by executing the effect that steals the line of sight multiple times. In that case, the reliability derived as a result of the effect executed later may be higher than the reliability derived as a result of the effect executed earlier with respect to the effect that steals the eyes multiple times. desirable. Further, the earlier effect and the later effect may be the same type of effect (for example, a pending change effect), or may be different types.

When a player operates a smartphone during a game, the player often operates the smartphone slightly below the player's chest or by holding the smartphone near the upper plate 33 or the effect button 41 of the game machine. It is considered that the line of sight is toward the lower part of the gaming machine. Therefore, in the effect of stealing the line of sight, a lamp effect may be added in addition to the configuration of the embodiment. In this case, it is desirable that the lamp effect includes, for example, a light emission effect (hereinafter referred to as a specific lamp effect) that causes the lamps around the lower part of the gaming machine to emit light. Specifically, among the lamps around the effect button 41 arranged at the lower center of the gaming machine frame, the lamps near the upper plate 33, and the lamps arranged around the glass door 7 of the gaming machine frame, they are arranged particularly on the lower side. It is desirable to make a lamp or the like emit light. In addition, since it is possible that the player is holding the smartphone with his left hand because he is operating the firing handle 35 with his right hand during the game, he is identified by using the lamp placed on the left side of the gaming machine frame. It is considered effective to perform a lamp effect.

Further, it is desirable that the specific lamp effect is executed at the timing when the execution of the effect that steals the line of sight is started (in the embodiment, the timing at which the appearance sound is output). As a result, the player who is looking at the smartphone can check the specific lamp effect in the peripheral field of view, so that the effect of stealing the line of sight can be made more effective. As described above, it is desirable that the specific lamp effect is performed at the same time as the start of the effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific lamp effect may be executed in the middle of the effect. Specifically, it may be considered after the appearance sound is output, during or after the output of the fanning sound, during or after the output of the collision change sound, and the like. In this case, for example, at the output timing of the appearance sound, the specific lamp effect is not executed (the lamp effect other than the specific lamp effect may or may not be executed), and then the collision change sound is output. A specific lamp effect may be executed at the timing (a lamp effect other than the specific lamp effect may or may not be executed). As a result, among the staging that captures the line of sight, at the start (at the time of the appearance sound output), at least the first staging means (sound output means) is used to perform the staging (even if the liquid crystal image is used at the same time as in the embodiment). Good), at the timing when the effect result is actually derived (at the time of collision change sound output), the effect is performed using the second effect means (ramp) in addition to the first effect means (the liquid crystal display at the same time as in the embodiment). (It is desirable to use an image), so the player who is operating the smartphone can grasp the content of the production through the production of sounds and lamps while looking at the smartphone, and in the production that takes away one's eyes. It is possible to provide the timing for switching the line of sight to the liquid crystal screen multiple times.

Further, not limited to the above description, the first effect means and the second effect means are used at the start (when the appearance sound is output), and at the timing when the effect result is actually derived (when the collision change sound is output). Either the first staging means or the second staging means may be used. Further, both the first staging means and the second staging means may be used at both timings. In that case, it is desirable to make the light emission pattern in the specific lamp staging different at each timing. In addition, the light emission time is relatively longer in the specific lamp effect at the start (when the appearance sound is output), and the light emission time is in the specific lamp effect at the timing when the effect result is actually derived (when the collision change sound is output). May use a relatively short pattern. And vice versa. Further, not only the light emission time in the specific lamp effect but also the light emission color and the light emission mode (blinking, lighting fade, extinguishing fade, etc.) may be different.

When there are a plurality of effects that capture the eyes, a specific appearance sound that is common among the plurality of effects may be output. As a result, the player operating the smartphone only has to pay attention to the specific appearance sound, so that the burden on the player can be reduced. In addition, it is desirable that the specific appearance sound in that case is not used in other preview productions. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a more sharp and easy-to-understand notice effect. In addition, when performing lamp emission, vibration, ventilation, temperature change of a specific part, etc. in place of the output of the appearance sound or together with the output of the appearance sound, a specific light emission pattern and vibration pattern common to a plurality of effects are executed. , Blow pattern, temperature change pattern may be used.

Further, when a common production mode is used among a plurality of productions in this way, not only the appearance sound but also the fanning sound and the collision change sound may be common. In that case, all of them may be common, or only some of them may be common.

It is desirable that the output volume (dB) of the sound before the execution of the effect that captures the eyes is in a low-pitched sound or a mute state. As a result, it is possible to make the appearance sound more prominent when performing an effect that steals the line of sight, and it is possible to enhance the effect as a gimmick of the player's awareness.

It may be configured to execute an effect that is a precursor to the image effect before the effect that captures the eyes is executed. For example, the liquid crystal screen may be darkened by the visibility suppression image at a timing before the output of the appearance sound to express an atmosphere different from the usual one. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player who is looking at the smartphone due to the darkening of the LCD screen in the peripheral field of view, and to the player who is looking at the LCD screen. , It is possible to express the expectation for the notice production that will start from now on in the form of a sense of discomfort. Further, in that case, an image effect other than darkening by the visibility suppression image, for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image or character image may be executed. Further, the image of the arrow in the embodiment, that is, the image used in the effect of stealing the line of sight may be used in the precursor effect, but the image of the arrow is not limited to appearing first in the precursor effect. It may be configured to perform another image effect that suggests that an image will appear.

When a production with a success pattern and a failure pattern is used as a production that steals the line of sight, the success pattern may be executed in the production with a success pattern and a failure pattern that outputs an appearance sound (or the appearance sound is relatively loud). There is a high possibility that the failure pattern will be executed (at least compared to the case where the appearance sound is output) in the production where there is a success pattern and a failure pattern that are configured to be high and do not output the appearance sound (or relatively small). It may be configured so that the failure pattern is likely to be executed). Further, when the appearance sound is output, the success pattern may be executed without fail.

FIG. 80 shows two desirable setting examples of various matters before and after the staging that captures the line of sight during one symbol change.

Before the staging that steals the eyes, the player's eyes are directed to a smartphone or the like other than the LCD screen, and after the staging that steals the eyes, if the player's eyes are considered to be directed to the LCD screen, the eyes are directed. Regardless of the type of production other than the production that robs you, it is basically preferable to execute it after the production that steals your eyes. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), general notices (step-up notices, pseudo-ream notices, timer notices, conversation notices, etc.), highly reliable notices, appearance of manufacturer patterns, vibration effects, ventilation effects, etc. Operational effects (one-shot effect, continuous hit effect, long press effect), premier effect, highly anticipated operation effect, other effects of the same kind as the eye-catching effect, blackout effect, trust derived by eye-catching effect Appearance rate, number of possible points (timing), etc. Regarding the degree of derivation possibility (the possibility that the effect is executed in the derived part after the execution of the predetermined effect) (with / without), it is generally more after the effect than before the effect that steals the line of sight. It is desirable to set it as such. Similarly, the average output volume is set higher after the staging effect, the timing of the maximum output volume is set after the staging effect, and the light emission frequency of the lamp effect is set after the staging effect. It is desirable to set it so that it is more after the front than before, and set the timing of the maximum output lamp brightness after the staging that catches the eye.

Further, as shown by an arrow at the upper part of FIG. 80 (a), of the fluctuation time of one fluctuation, the fluctuation time after the effect of stealing the line of sight is longer than the fluctuation time before the effect of stealing the line of sight. It is desirable to configure it as follows. As a result, the time after the player pays attention to the liquid crystal screen can be lengthened, so that the player can enjoy the liquid crystal display more meaningfully.

In this way, it is most desirable to set the settings as shown in FIG. 80 (a) for the effects before and after the effects that take away the line of sight, but considering the balance of the entire fluctuation, etc., all the effects are shown in FIG. 80 (a). It is not realistic to set like.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the staging that is supposed to be executed in the latter half of the fluctuation, such as a highly reliable notice, the appearance of the manufacturer's pattern, the premier staging, and the highly expected operation staging, appears as a general rule. Regarding the rate, the number of points (timing) that can appear, and the degree of derivability (the possibility that the effect will be executed in the derivation part after the execution of the predetermined effect) (yes / no), than before the effect that steals the eyes. Set so that there are more later, but other general notices (step-up notice, pseudo-continuous notice, timer notice, conversation notice, etc.), vibration effect, blower effect, operation effect (one-shot push effect, (Continuous hitting effect, long press effect), other effects of the same type as the eye-catching effect, blackout effect, notice effect that can derive higher reliability than the reliability result derived by the eye-catching effect, success pattern and failure For a staging with a pattern, a one-shot notification staging such as a fixed sound staging or a rainbow staging, the appearance rate, the number of points (timing) that can appear, and the derivability (after the predetermined staging is executed, the staging is executed in the derivation part). Regarding the degree (presence / absence) of the degree (possibility of being performed), it may be set so that there are more before the staging that takes the eyes. In addition, the average output volume is set before the staging that steals the line of sight, the timing of the maximum output volume is set before the staging that steals the line of sight, and the light emission frequency of the lamp effect is set before the staging that steals the line of sight. The front may be set to be more than the back, and the timing of the maximum output lamp brightness may be set before the staging effect.

In each of FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), of the fluctuation time of one fluctuation, the fluctuation time after the effect of stealing the line of sight is longer than the fluctuation time before the effect of stealing the line of sight. However, on the contrary, the fluctuation time before the effect of stealing the line of sight may be longer than the fluctuation time after the effect of stealing the line of sight.

Regarding the output volume of the sound emitted from the gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production by outputting a louder sound, so if the gaming machine is manufactured without certain restrictions, it will be excessive. There is a possibility that the audio will be output. For example, when a pachinko / pachislot machine is installed in a hall, it outputs a louder sound than that of an adjacent other company's pachinko / pachislot machine, thereby hindering the sound output from the other company's pachinko / pachislot machine. This is because it is thought that it can be made more conspicuous. However, if such competition is allowed, there is a problem of inducing a noise problem in the hall. Therefore, when manufacturing a gaming machine, a certain limit is set on the output volume. In order to perform more intonation and sharper audio effects under such restrictions and conditions in the manufacture of gaming machines, it is possible to configure an effect system that changes the volume level as described in the embodiment. desirable.

The volume (dB) data shown in the embodiment is measured by picking up the sound emitted from the gaming machine with a sound collecting microphone. Therefore, these data are influenced not a little by the surrounding environmental sound. For example, in the embodiment, the volume does not become 0 dB even in the mute state, and the predetermined volume value is maintained on the data. In this way, since there is always some kind of environmental sound around the gaming machine, it is not possible to consider the surrounding environmental sound separately when it comes to the problem of the volume of the gaming machine. It is necessary to manufacture the sound so that the volume emitted from the slingshot is within a certain range. Conversely, even if the ambient sound is completely eliminated and the volume (dB) emitted by the gaming machine is measured by some method, the obtained data will be based on the actual installation status of the gaming machine. It is meaningless data because it does not correspond to the usage situation at all.

Further, regarding the sound emitted by the gaming machine, it is necessary to consider not only the sound output from the speaker but also the operating sound such as the vibration sound when the effect button or the like is vibrated as shown in the embodiment. Nowadays, in particular, a wide variety of effects using movable objects have been performed. Among them, for example, an effect of vibrating an object such as an effect button by a vibe motor or an effect of a drive motor. There are many productions with loud operation sounds, such as a production in which an object such as a button is reciprocated at high speed in a predetermined direction such as up and down, left and right to output a rattling sound. In those productions, the volume of collision sounds generated by the movement of moving objects such as production buttons colliding with surrounding decorations and structures is also increasing, and the overall volume is also taken into consideration. It is necessary to design a good production. Furthermore, while the volume of the sound output from the speaker (normal sound effect) can be changed, the volume of the operating sound (specific sound effect) such as vibration sound cannot be changed, so there are multiple levels that can be set. It is necessary to establish a relationship between the volume level and the vibration volume so that the corresponding relationship is more optimal for each volume level. The above-described embodiment discloses an example in which the staging system is constructed in a form considered to be more optimal.

In the embodiment, when the player touches or presses the vibrating effect button 41, the drive of the effect button (predetermined part) 41 by the vibrating device (drive means) 72 is restricted, and the effect button 41 becomes Although the point that the volume of the vibration sound can be adjusted as compared with the state where the vibration sound is not touched, the adjustment of the vibration sound as a specific sound effect is not limited to this. For example, the vibration width when the vibration of a predetermined part such as the effect button 41 by the driving means such as the vibrating device 72 is executed, the speed (frequency) when the vibration is executed, the frequency at which the vibration is executed, and the like are changed. The volume of the vibration sound may be adjusted by making it possible and making it possible to change them by operating the vibration sound adjusting operation means (switch / button, etc.). In this case, the vibration sound adjusting operation means may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 1 so that the player can operate it, or on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 so that only those involved in the hall can operate it. It may be provided in. Further, the adjustment amount may be changed stepwise or steplessly (continuously), and the front side of the gaming machine main body 1 so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can grasp the adjustment amount (adjustment level, etc.). Can be displayed on the display means (liquid crystal display means 106, etc.) or the display means on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1.

When the vibration sound can be adjusted by pressing the effect button (predetermined part) 41 or the like by hand, the change amount of the vibration sound changes according to the operation amount (operation width), operation force, etc. You may. In this case, the volume may be changed stepwise or steplessly (continuously) according to the operation amount, the operation force, and the like.

When a vibration sound is generated as a specific sound effect, it may be configured so that other movable bodies of the board or frame are not operated. Further, after operating the movable body of the board or the frame, the vibration sound by the effect button 41 or the like may be generated.

The vibration sound as the specific sound effect may be generated at a timing other than that illustrated in the embodiment. For example, in the example of FIG. 41, after the button is pressed (49s), the timing substantially at the same time as the display of the liquid crystal rainbow effect (for example, 51s), the timing after the display of the rainbow effect ends (for example, 61s), and thereafter. It may be executed while the liquid crystal display is in progress (for example, from 62 s). At that time, it is configured to generate a vibration sound by performing a vibration effect with a vibration pattern according to the progress of the liquid crystal effect (for example, vibrating according to the attack motion of the main character or the motion that causes the monster to fall). You may.

In the embodiment, when the specific sound effect (vibration effect, etc.) is not executed, the case where the first set volume (for example, volume level 3) is set and the case where the second set volume (for example, volume level 7) is set are used. The volume increase rate (volume ratio) due to the sound effect in the above is set to be uniform (for example, 1.2), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume increase rate when the specific sound effect is not executed may be changed. good. Even in that case, it is desirable to configure the volume so that the increase rate of the volume becomes small when the specific sound effect is executed.

In the embodiment, the rate of increase in volume (volume ratio) due to the sound effect between the case where the player setting value is set to the minimum value and the case where the player setting value is set to the maximum value is substantially constant (for example, 1.2). However, the rate of increase in volume (volume ratio) due to the sound effect at any two values in the selectable range of the player set value may be substantially constant.

The rate of increase in volume when the volume level is raised by one step may be configured to be different depending on the step of the volume level (that is, for example, in the case of 1 → 2 and in the case of 2 → 3). In that case, the rate of increase may be different for all volume levels, or only the rate of increase in some step changes may be different from the rate of increase in other step changes.

When the upper limit of the volume level that can be changed by the player can be changed by the hall personnel (for example, in the case of FIGS. 49, 59, etc.), the volume by the normal sound effect is larger than the volume by the specific sound effect, and the specific sound effect is produced. The number of player set values that make it difficult to hear the sound of (hereinafter referred to as the number of first player set values) and the volume of the normal sound effect are smaller than the volume of the specific sound effect, and the sound of the specific sound effect is heard. It is desirable to provide a hole setting value that is substantially the same as the number of easy player setting values (hereinafter referred to as the number of second player setting values). In that case, the number of hole set values in which the number of first player set values is larger than the number of second player set values and the number of first player set values are larger than the number of second player set values. It is desirable to provide both a small hole setting value, but only one of them may be provided.

As shown in the embodiment, the rate of increase in volume during execution of the specific sound effect may be different depending on the timing of executing the specific sound effect. In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the rate of increase at the timing of notifying the result of success or failure at the end of reach is the smallest.

The volume level that can be adjusted by the player's operation is not limited to five levels, and may be less than five levels or six or more levels. Further, even if the number of steps of the volume level that can be adjusted is changed by the player's operation, the volume increase rate may be the value described in the embodiment at the lowest step and the highest step.

When there are a plurality of vibration patterns in the vibration effect, the output volume of the vibration sound may be configured to be different depending on each vibration pattern. In that case, it is desirable to configure so that the output volume of the vibration sound accompanying the vibration effect performed when notifying the hit / fail result at the end of the reach is the maximum. In addition, a vibration pattern that intermittently generates vibration and a vibration pattern that continuously generates vibration are provided, and the volume of the vibration sound is the same, but the former has a vibration stop period as a whole. It may be configured so that the volume due to vibration becomes small.

A plurality of normal sound effects may be executed while the vibration sound as the specific sound effect is generated. Further, each of the plurality of normal sound effects and the vibration sound as the specific sound effect may be executed for the same period or at the same timing. Further, the first normal sound effect may be executed during the output of the vibration sound as the specific sound effect, and then the second normal sound effect may be executed. Further, the first normal sound effect is executed during the output of the vibration sound as the specific sound effect, and the second normal sound effect is executed while the first normal sound effect is being executed. You may.

The normal sound effect may be executed before the output of the vibration sound generated by the vibration effect as the specific sound effect. Further, the normal sound effect may be executed at substantially the same timing as the timing of outputting the vibration sound as the specific sound effect.

At the timing of starting the output of the vibration sound generated by the vibration effect as the specific sound effect, or during the output of the vibration sound, the normal sound effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is configured to be executed, and then a predetermined value is specified. It may be configured to output a different normal sound effect (eg, BGM after pressing the button) at the timing.

The BGM may be output after the button is pressed at the timing when the output of the vibration sound generated by the vibration effect as the specific sound effect is started or during the output of the vibration sound. In this case, it is desirable that the BGM data after the button is pressed is configured so that the first half is muted or quiet, and the volume of the BGM is increased during or after the output of the vibration sound. On the contrary, the volume of the first half portion may be loud, and the volume of the BGM may be muted or muted at the timing during or after the output of the vibration sound.

Before the output of the vibration sound as a specific sound effect is started, the reach effect BGM is stopped so that the volume (dB) due to the normal sound effect is relatively small, and after the output of the vibration sound, the normal sound effect is used. It is desirable to output a sound different from the reach effect BGM so that the volume (dB) is relatively high. As a result, the volume (dB) is inflated before and after the vibration sound, so that more effective voice production can be performed. In addition, in order to add inflection not only to the voice but also to the lamp, turn off or reduce the emission brightness and frequency before the output of the vibration sound, and turn on or increase the emission brightness and frequency after the output of the vibration sound. It may be configured.

It is desirable that each normal sound effect is output by using a different reproduction CH out of a plurality of audio reproduction CHs.

Of the various sounds output from the speaker, the specific sound may not be affected by the volume adjustment by the player. In this case, the specific sound is not affected by the volume adjustment. Therefore, for example, when the volume level is set to the lowest level by the volume adjustment by the player, the lowest level is obtained for the sound other than the specific sound output from the speaker. On the other hand, for a specific sound, it is output at a predetermined level such as the highest level and the intermediate level. With this configuration, regardless of which volume level is set, the specific sound can be output so as to be easier for the player to hear than other sounds. It is desirable to use this specific sound, for example, in a relatively reliable production or a production that captures the eyes of the embodiment. As a result, even if the volume value is set to the lowest level, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize a highly reliable effect or an effect that steals the line of sight.

Further, the volume of the specific sound may be set to be the same as that of the error notification sound. Further, when the specific sound is output, the sound other than the specific sound may be faded out, for example, to be muted or in a quiet state to make the specific sound more prominent. Further, the specific sound may be configured to be excluded from the target of fade-out processing, muffling, or low-pitched sound when a sound having a relatively high priority is output. This makes it possible to prevent the specific sound from becoming difficult to hear even when the output of the specific sound and the voice effect having a relatively high priority are executed in parallel. When performing error notification, it is desirable to configure the specific sound to be muted or quiet so as not to interfere with the error notification. Further, it is desirable to set the specific sound so that the volume is easier to hear than the operation sound in the specific sound production, for example, the vibration sound. Further, when it is desired to make the vibration sound (operation sound in the specific sound production) stand out as an effect expression, the vibration sound may be configured to be easier to hear than the specific sound.

In addition, as an example of outputting a specific sound with the above-mentioned staging that steals the line of sight (holding change effect, etc.), all the sounds output by the staging that steals the line of sight are set as the specific sound so as not to be affected by the volume adjustment. You may do it. Further, only the appearance sound output when the arrow appears may be set as the specific sound. Further, only the collision sound when the arrow collides with the hold may be set as the specific sound. Further, both the appearance sound and the collision sound may be set as specific sounds. In this way, by setting a series of sounds output as a warning sound as a specific sound, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the effect of stealing the line of sight. Further, by setting only the appearance sound and the collision sound, which are particularly important, as the specific sound, it is possible to make the player recognize the highly important sound more pinpointly without making it redundant.

In the embodiment, the rainbow effect is reproduced in one cut from the accessory effect (for example, 49s to 60s in FIG. 41), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rainbow effect may be reproduced as separate cuts, or during the rainbow effect. You may put a cut split in and configure it to display another rainbow effect. At that time, it is desirable that the rainbow effect before and after the cut switching has a similar or similar display mode.

In the embodiment, the cut split is not inserted during the output of the vibration sound as the specific sound effect so that the player is made more aware of the vibration effect and the effect is enhanced. However, the vibration sound as the specific sound effect is achieved. A cut split may be inserted in the output of.

The effect scene of the liquid crystal screen may be advanced and the cut may be switched during the operation of the movable body, while the movable body is stopped at the effect position after the operation, or while the movable body returns from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, even while the movable body is in motion, the progress of the staging scene can be advanced without stopping. In addition, by switching the cut, the content of the production scene changes during the operation of the movable body, so that it is possible to perform a more unexpected production. In this case, it is desirable to display different characters in the preceding and following staging scenes. Further, the presence or absence of the character may be expressed by using the cut split, such as switching the cut and not displaying the displayed character in the next scene. Further, this can be applied not only during the operation of the movable body but also during the execution of the operation effect. In the operation effect, it is considered that before the operation button image is displayed, while the operation button image is displayed, and after the operation button image is displayed, and the above-mentioned contents are replaced with the operation effect. You may.

When the operation effect is executed after the operation of the movable body, it is desirable that the operation effect is executed after the cut of the effect scene is switched at least once after the operation of the movable body is completed. As a result, after the movement of the movable body, the production scene can be progressed once, and the player can execute the operation production after grasping the progress content due to the switching of the production scene. However, it is easy to understand the content of the production, and the composition of the production can be grasped in units of each block, so it is possible to proceed with the production more interesting. Further, it is desirable that the same configuration is used not only when the operation effect is executed after the operation of the movable body but also when the operation effect of the movable body is executed after the operation effect is executed. Further, the configuration is not limited to the movement of the movable body and the operation effect, and the same configuration may be used when performing other effects. For example, even when a cut-in notice suggesting the reliability of the fluctuation or the reach effect is executed before and after the operation of the movable body or before and after the operation effect, the same configuration can be adopted. .. Further, the mode may be changed depending on the content of the effect to be executed. That is, when the operation effect is executed after the movement of the movable body, the cut split of the effect scene is performed during that time, but when the operation effect is executed after the cut-in notice is executed, the cut split of the effect scene is performed during that time. It may be configured not to do so. As a result, after the predetermined effect is executed first, the player can grasp whether or not the effect scene has been switched, so that the execution content of the subsequent predetermined effect can be inferred. It should be noted that the above-mentioned contents are merely examples, and the contents of the predetermined predetermined production earlier and the contents of the predetermined production afterwards are not particularly limited. That is, it is important whether or not to execute the cut split in the interim period, not limited to the contents of the notice before and after that.

When the reach symbol (example: "7 ↓ 7") is displayed on the LCD and the undetermined symbol (middle symbol) is sent in sequence before the operation effect is executed at the end of the reach. For example, while the symbols are being sent in the order of "717" ⇒ "727" ⇒ ... "757", the cut of the production scene executed behind them may be switched, but the jackpot production mode is "777". It is desirable that the cuts of the staging scene are not switched after a predetermined timing when the above is approaching. The predetermined timing is arbitrary, for example, it may be when it reaches "767" immediately before "777" which is a big hit production mode, or at the start of the subsequent tame period (lamp or voice output). It may be the timing to reduce). Further, when the operation effect is executed at the timing of "767", the cut of the effect scene may be switched until the effect button image fades in, and then the cut may not be switched, or the effect button image may be configured. Is displayed and it may be configured not to switch after the operation valid period has started, or regardless of whether the effect button image is displayed and the operation valid period has started, "767" just before the jackpot effect mode. After the display such as "," may be configured so that the cut is not switched at the beginning of the tame period (timing at which the output of the lamp or the sound is reduced) or after that. In this way, by permitting or limiting the cut switching of the production scene before, during, or during the execution of a specific advance notice production such as pattern feed or operation production, a more sharp and easy-to-understand reach production is executed. It becomes possible to do.

By changing the frequency of switching the effect scene by the cut split, it is possible to execute the fanning effect of whether or not the specific effect is executed. For example, the first scene (example: the face of the hero) and the second scene (example: the face of a monster) are alternated and gradually increased in speed as a fanning effect that fuels whether the result of executing the operation effect is success or failure. By switching so as to be, it may be possible to perform a fanning effect until it is known whether it is successful or unsuccessful. Further, it is desirable to make the staging expression different between the case where the cut is switched as the staging effect and the case where the cut is switched as the progress of the staging scene instead of the staging effect. Specifically, when switching cuts as a fanning effect, the first scene and the second scene are repeated alternately so that the expression does not progress to the third scene beyond that. Then, it is possible to give the player the impression that the progress of the staging scene has stopped here. On the other hand, when switching cuts for the purpose of progressing the staging scene, if the first scene and the second scene are repeated alternately, the player may mistakenly think that the progress has stopped. In addition, if such an expression is performed at a timing that does not require a fanning, there will be no sharpness with the case where the fanning effect is really desired, and the effecting expression will be difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, in this case, it is desirable not to use or frequently use expressions that switch similar scenes alternately.

A whiteout image or a blackout image may be inserted at the timing of switching the cut. Specifically, by switching from the first scene to the whiteout image to the second scene, it is more difficult to understand the appearance due to the sudden switching of the scene than when switching from the first scene to the second scene. It is possible to reduce the problem. In this case, the configuration is 3 cuts including the intermediate scene (white image), but the cut length of the intermediate scene (whiteout) is shorter than the cut length of the first scene and / or the second scene. Is desirable. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the first scene and the second scene are related to the reach production, and the player recognizes the intermediate scene (whiteout) as an image that is not directly related to the reach production. It is possible to make it. In this way, there are scenes for expressing the content of the reach production (first scene and second scene) and scenes for expressing the content of the reach production in an easy-to-understand manner and executing it to give an impact (intermediate scene). , The execution scale may be different, or the production mode of the lamp or sound during execution of the first scene and / or the second scene and the intermediate scene (whiteout) may be different. Lamps and sounds that are output according to the execution of the intermediate scene (whiteout) may be prepared. In addition, such an expression may be used at the time of staging, for example, the switching of the staging scene such as the first scene ⇒ intermediate scene (whiteout) ⇒ second scene ⇒ intermediate scene (whiteout) ⇒ first scene is repeated. By doing so, you may try to perform a fanning effect. Also, when switching from the first scene to the second scene when the first scene and the second scene are alternately repeated as in the case of the first scene ⇒ intermediate scene (whiteout) ⇒ second scene ⇒ first scene. It may be configured so as to sandwich an intermediate scene (whiteout) only in.

The reliability of the reach effect may be different depending on the number of cuts. For example, the reach effect with a large number of cuts may be set to have a higher reliability than the reach effect with a small number of cuts. As a result, the player can judge whether or not the reach production can be expected by counting the number of cut switching, so from the viewpoint of whether or not the cut switching of the production scene occurs frequently during the reach. , It becomes possible to enjoy the reach production. In addition, you may dare to execute a reach effect that does not switch cuts at all. In that case, if the specifications are such that the hit is confirmed if the reach effect that does not switch cuts is executed. The player can enjoy the reach production while hoping that the cuts will not be switched. In this way, by making it possible to execute multiple reach effects with different cut splits and reach effects without cut splits, it is possible to enhance the overall interest of the reach effects and create a higher quality production system. It will be possible to build.

If there is a specific effect (such as a notice that suggests reliability or a notice of development of the reach effect) that has a higher display priority during the reach effect, it is being executed behind the scenes while the specific effect is being executed. It may be configured to advance the production scene of the reach effect and execute the cut switching. Further, during the execution of the specific effect, the image of the reach effect behind may not be visible at all, or the visibility suppression image (black solid) or the like may be superimposed on the reach effect so that the image can be visually recognized but is difficult to see. Or you may simply execute a specific effect on top of the reach effect. Then, it is desirable to limit the end timing so that the timing at which the execution of the specific effect ends does not overlap with the cut switching timing of the reach effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the cut is switched immediately after the end of the specific effect and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the content of the reach effect. The same can be said about the start timing of the specific effect. Further, it is desirable to configure the effect scene before the execution of the specific effect and the effect scene after the execution so that the same character is displayed. As a result, the production scene is switched by switching the cut during the specific production, but since the same character is displayed before and after the specific production, it is possible to suppress the apparent incomprehensibleness while advancing the production scene. .. On the other hand, when the unexpectedness is more important, different characters may be displayed before and after the specific effect, or the character displayed in the previous scene may not be displayed in the later scene.

In the embodiment, during the execution of the display effect, the output of the second BGM (execution of the second sound effect) is performed after the output of the first BGM is stopped (after the execution of the first sound effect) and after the BGM stop period (output stop period). An example is shown in which the scene of the display effect is changed from the first scene to the second scene at the timing of starting and outputting the second BGM (execution of the second sound effect). The effect and the second sound effect are not limited to BGM, and may be an arbitrary sound effect that outputs an arbitrary sound such as a telop voice. Further, a mute period in which no sound is output from the speaker may be set between the execution of the first sound effect and the start of the execution of the second sound effect, which is different from the first sound effect and / or the second sound effect. A predetermined sound may be output.

In the volume level setting table (FIGS. 49 and 53) of the second and third embodiments, the predetermined step value is fixed for each hole setting value for the hole setting values corresponding to the normal mode and the power saving mode. For example, the volume level corresponding to the player set values M1 to M5 may be set to 3 → 4 → 6 → 9 → 13, so that the predetermined step value may be changed. Further, in the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 49 and 53) of the second and third embodiments, the volume levels of the player set values other than the minimum may be the same among the plurality of hole set values.

In the embodiment, the volume level of the error sound can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140, but cannot be adjusted by the volume control means 39. However, not only the volume control means 39 but also the volume adjustment knob 140 can be used to adjust the error sound. It may be configured so that the volume level cannot be adjusted.

Even when the volume level of the error sound (and the specific notification sound) can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140, the lamp light amount level at the time of error notification may not be adjusted.

When the volume level of the error sound (and the specific notification sound) can be adjusted with the volume adjustment knob 140, the volume adjustment knob 140 can be used to adjust the specific type of notification sound (for example, RAM clear notification sound) among the error sounds and the like. It may not be possible (eg, always at maximum volume level). Even if the volume adjustment knob 140 cannot be used to adjust the volume adjustment knob 140 for a specific type of notification sound (for example, RAM clear notification sound), if the volume adjustment knob 140 is set to silence, a specific type of notification sound (for example, RAM clear notification sound) is set. Sound) may be switched to silence or a predetermined low volume.

For example, in the fourteenth embodiment (FIG. 71), when the upper limit of the normal volume level is smaller than the maximum volume level, the error volume level is made larger than the upper limit, and the upper limit of the normal volume level is the maximum volume level. In the same case as, the upper limit value (maximum volume level) is set to the error volume level, but the error volume level in the case of at least some hole setting values may be set higher than the maximum volume level in the normal volume level.

In the various examples described above, a lower limit value may be set for the error volume level so that the error volume level does not fall below the lower limit value even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated to the lower side.

The volume level of the error sound may also be adjustable by both the volume adjusting knob 140 and the volume operating means 39. In that case, the volume level setting table for the normal sound may be applied to the error sound as it is, or the volume level setting table for the error sound may be separately provided. However, even in that case, the lamp light intensity level at the time of error notification may not be adjusted by the player's operation.

Although the upper limit of the volume level is different for each hole setting value, the initial volume level (volume level corresponding to the initial position) may be the same (FIG. 62). In this case, even if the initial volume level is the same, the display of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be different by changing the initial position.

The upper limit of the volume level corresponding to the hole setting value in the power saving mode may be any of the maximum value, the minimum value, and the intermediate value of the volume level in the normal mode.

The volume adjustment notification period is started not only when the volume control means 39 is operated but also when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated, and the liquid crystal display means 106 is configured to display the volume adjustment notification image PV. May be good.

In the embodiment, the light amount level is not provided with an operating means such as the volume adjusting knob 140, and can be adjusted only by operating the light amount operating means 40, but the light amount level is also the same as in the case of the volume level described above. The light intensity adjusting knob (instep operating means) arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 and the light intensity operating means 40 may be configured to be adjustable. That is, all the above-mentioned descriptions regarding the volume level can be read as the light intensity level. In this case, a light amount adjusting knob may be provided separately from the volume adjusting knob 140, or the volume adjusting knob 140 and the light amount adjusting knob may be shared. When the light amount adjustment knob is provided separately from the volume adjustment knob 140, the number of steps of the hall set value may be different. Further, the number of steps of the player set value may be different depending on the volume and the amount of light.

Regarding the volume level setting table shown in FIG. 49 and the like, the minimum value that can be selected by the player for each hole setting value is set to the same value for each hole setting value, and then the player selects the minimum value according to the selected hole setting value. It was decided to make each upper limit different by making the amount of change of the possible set value different, but it is not limited to this, for example, the minimum value that can be selected by the player is set to a different value for each hole set value. Then, by making the amount of change of the set value that can be selected by the player the same according to the selected hole set value, each upper limit value may be set to be different.

Regarding the volume level setting table for error sounds shown in FIG. 71 and the like, one type of value is selected based on the hall setting value, but the value is not limited to this, and a plurality of values can be set for error sounds. You may refer to the volume level setting table of. In this case, by setting all the multiple values that can be selected based on the hole setting value of 1 to the same value, the player operates the operation means on the front side during the error, so that the volume level setting table for the error sound is used. Even if the reference destination of is changed, the selected values are all the same value, so that the actual output volume level is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from changing the output volume level during error notification. Further, when the reference destination of the volume level setting table for the error sound is changed by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, different values are selected before and after the change. In this case, Will change the actual output volume. As a result, the output volume level during error notification can be changed by the hall employee. In addition, when the reference destination of the volume level setting table for the error sound is changed by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, the volume for the error sound is selected so that the same value is selected before and after the change. By setting the value in the level setting table, the output volume level during error notification may be configured so that it cannot be changed by the hall employee.

When the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV being displayed may be hidden. Further, it may be hidden and then displayed again. Further, when displaying again, it is desirable to update and display the display content of the volume adjustment notification image PV according to the value updated after the change. Further, when displaying again, the volume adjustment operation by the player may be displayed as a trigger, or may be displayed again at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was hidden.

Regarding the volume adjustment notification image PV shown in FIG. 63 and the like, there are a bar (volume display figure) showing the current volume level value, a bar showing a selectable range, and a bar showing a non-selectable range, all of which are shown. It is desirable to set the priority of the display of to be in front of the effect display and the symbol display related to the game. Further, at least for the bar showing the current volume level value, the display priority may be set higher than the effect display or the symbol display related to the game, and the bar showing the selectable range and the non-selectable range are shown. The bar may be set to have a lower priority than the effect display or the symbol display related to the game. Further, the configuration may be the opposite. In addition, the bar indicating the non-selectable range is set to be in front of the effect display and the symbol display, and at least one of the bar indicating the current volume level value and the bar indicating the selectable range is the effect related to the game. The display priority may be set lower than that of the display or the symbol display.

In addition, by setting the bar indicating the current volume level value, the bar indicating the selectable range, and the bar indicating the non-selectable range in a transparent display mode, the priority of each display is displayed as an effect related to the game. Even when it is set to be on the front side of the or symbol display, it is possible to perform the display without deteriorating the visibility of the effect display or the symbol display related to the game. Further, in this case, at least one of the bar indicating the current volume level value, the bar indicating the selectable range, and the bar indicating the non-selectable range, or all of them are set to have a transparent display mode. You may.

The sub control means (sub control board) has a storage area (hard Vol) for storing the volume value based on the volume adjustment knob 140 and a storage area (soft Vol) for storing the volume value based on the operation of the volume control means 39. You may be prepared. These store the setting values selected from the volume level setting table described above. The volume value based on the volume adjustment knob 140 is a predetermined value selected from the volume level setting table based on the above-mentioned initial position, and the volume value based on the operation of the volume control means 39 is based on the operation of the player. It is a predetermined value selected from the volume level setting table.

Incidentally, in each embodiment described later, it is desirable to use a volume level setting table in which the upper limit value of each is set as the initial position as the initial position set according to the position of the volume adjustment knob 140. It is not limited to this. Further, the volume value based on the volume control means 39 is set to a predetermined value selected from the volume level setting table based on the initial position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the case of an error, the volume adjustment knob is used. A predetermined value may be acquired from the error table according to the position of 140, and the predetermined value may be stored in the storage area (hard Vol) for storing the volume value based on the volume adjustment knob 140.

First, when the power is turned on, predetermined values corresponding to the positions of the volume adjustment knobs 140 are stored in the storage area (hard Vol) and the storage area (soft Vol), respectively. Then, in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume used for determining the final output sound based on the predetermined value stored in the storage area (soft Vol), the storage area (soft Vol) is stored. ) Stores the predetermined value stored in. In this way, the initial setting process for setting a predetermined value in each storage area when the power is turned on is performed.

After the initial setting process is completed, a monitoring process is performed in which the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 and the contents of the storage area (hard Vol) are periodically compared and monitored. In this monitoring process, if the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 and the contents of the storage area (hard Vol) match, the monitoring process ends, but if they do not match, it is determined that the volume adjustment knob 140 has been operated. , A predetermined value corresponding to the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 after the change is stored in the storage area (hard Vol) and the storage area (soft Vol), respectively. Subsequently, a new predetermined value is set in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume used to determine the final output sound based on the changed storage area (soft Vol) value. Be remembered. Through these series of processes, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated, the output sound emitted by the gaming machine is changed.

Next, a change process when the volume control means 39 is operated by the player will be described. When the volume control means 39 is operated by the player, the predetermined value corresponding to the operation is not stored in the storage area (hard Vol), but is stored only in the storage area (soft Vol). Subsequently, a new predetermined value is set in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume used to determine the final output volume based on the changed storage area (soft Vol) value. Be remembered. Through these series of processes, when the volume control means 39 is operated, the output volume emitted by the gaming machine is changed. Further, when the volume control means 39 is operated by the player, the above-mentioned change process is executed, and a display process for transmitting a signal for displaying the volume adjustment notification image PV to the display means is executed. By merging these processes, the output volume of the gaming machine can be adjusted, and the adjusted content can be known to the player.

Next, an error sound having a higher priority than the voice related to the game (not limited to the one that notifies the abnormality of the game machine, including, for example, RAM clear notification, backup recovery notification, setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, etc.) is output. The error notification processing in the case will be described.

When a specific error occurs, the storage area (soft Vol) does not store the predetermined value for error output, but stores the total volume used to determine the final output volume (soft Vol). Store in the total volume storage area). As a result, when a specific error occurs, the output sound emitted by the gaming machine is changed to the output sound for the error. Further, while the error sound is being output, it is necessary to stop the output of the sound related to the game to make the error sound stand out. Therefore, the maximum value is set for the error volume value for determining the output sound of the channel in which the error sound is registered, and the output sound for the game for determining the output sound of the channel in which the sound related to the game is registered. The volume value is set to 0. Incidentally, the sub-control means determines the final output volume from the relationship between the volume value for games and the volume value for errors and the predetermined value stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). For example, when one of the values is 0, the final output volume is set to 0 regardless of the other value. In this way, the sub-control means finally sets / changes the volume value for games and the volume value for errors, and sets / changes the predetermined value stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). It is configured to adjust the output volume. Further, a plurality of game volume values and error volume values may be prepared instead of one type, and have a primary volume for determining the primary volume value and a secondary volume for determining the secondary volume value. You may do so. In this case, the sound related to the game is emitted at the output volume calculated by the primary volume value for the game, the secondary volume value for the game, and the total volume value, and the sound related to the error is the primary volume value for the error and the 2 for the error. It will be emitted at the output volume calculated by the next volume value and the total volume value.

Here, an embodiment when a specific error occurs will be described. For example, when a specific error 1 (eg, a movable body error) occurs, the sound, the lamp, and the display means of the gaming machine are used to notify that the error state is in effect. At this time, the sub-control means refers to the error flag indicating the error state and executes the notification using the sound, the lamp, and the display means, but the storage area (soft Vol) is triggered by the ON of the error flag. ), But the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume. As a result, during the error occurrence, the total volume is determined based on the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) instead of the storage area (soft Vol), so that the output volume of the error sound is the volume. It will be determined based on a predetermined value according to the position of the adjustment knob 140. With this configuration, the output volume during the error can be adjusted / changed with the volume adjustment knob 140, and the hall employee can adjust / change the output volume during the error. Further, since it is decided not to refer to the predetermined value stored in the storage area (software Vol) while the error occurs, even if the volume control means 39 is operated by the player, the storage area (the storage area (soft Vol)) ( Regardless of whether the value of Soft Vol) has been changed (may or may not be changed), the total volume is determined based on the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol). Therefore, the value of the storage area (total volume storage area) is not changed. This makes it possible to intentionally lower the output volume during the occurrence of an error and prevent an act such as making it difficult to find fraudulent acts.

In this case, it is desirable that the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed on the display means even when the volume control means 39 is operated by the player during the error occurrence. Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, or the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. In this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be used. It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

In this case, the amount of light may be adjusted by the player. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the light emission pattern so that the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the error cannot be adjusted. Further, the light amount adjustment by the player may not be possible during the error notification.

Then, when the specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) ends, the sub-control means refers to the fact that the error flag indicating the error state is turned off, and the sound, the lamp, and the display means. End the notification using. At this time, with the OFF of the error flag as a trigger, the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) instead of the storage area (hard Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume. Then, the total volume is set based on the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) as before the error occurs.

Next, a case where a specific error 2 (example: door opening error) occurs will be described (the explanation of the same part as in the case of the above-mentioned specific error 1 is omitted, and the explanation of the different part is mainly performed). When a door opening error occurs, the sound, lamp, and display means of the gaming machine are used to notify the error state, but the specific error 2 (example: door opening error) is an error due to sound. The notification ends at a predetermined timing, the error notification by the display means ends at the timing of the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed), and the error notification by the lamp ends at the timing of the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed). Is configured to end at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the end of.

(Pattern 1) The effect control means is a value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) instead of the storage area (hard Vol), triggered by the presence or absence of an error sound output at a predetermined timing at which the error notification by sound ends. Is stored in the storage area for storing the total volume (total volume storage area). In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV is hidden until the predetermined timing at which the error notification by sound ends, and can be displayed at the predetermined timing at which the error notification by sound ends (displayed when there is an adjustment operation by the player). It may be done or intentionally displayed). Here, as a change example when the volume adjustment notification image PV is hidden, the same configuration as the content of the volume adjustment notification image PV described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (example: movable body error) may be used.

Further, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume adjustment by operating the volume control means 39 may have the same configuration as the content described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (example: movable body error).

(Pattern 2) The effect control means receives a detection of an error target event (here, door closure) as a trigger at a predetermined timing at which an error target event (here, door closure) ends, and a storage area (a storage area (here). The value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) instead of the hard Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume.

In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV is hidden until the predetermined timing at which the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is completed, and at the predetermined timing at which the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is completed. It may be possible to display (display or intentionally display when there is an adjustment operation by the player). Here, as a change example when the volume adjustment notification image PV is hidden, the same configuration as the content of the volume adjustment notification image PV described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (example: movable body error) may be used. Further, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume adjustment by operating the volume control means 39 may have the same configuration as the content described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (example: movable body error).

(Pattern 3) In the sub-control means, the error flag is turned off at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event (here, the door is closed) that is the target of the error is completed in the error notification by the lamp. Is used as a trigger to store the values stored in the storage area (soft Vol) instead of the storage area (hard Vol) in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume.

In addition, the error notification by the lamp hides the volume adjustment notification image PV from the end of the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) to a predetermined timing (30 seconds later), and the error notification by the lamp is performed. It can be displayed at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is completed (displayed or intentionally displayed when there is an adjustment operation by the player). It may be set to. Here, as a change example when the volume adjustment notification image PV is hidden, the same configuration as the content of the volume adjustment bar described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (example: movable body error) may be used. Further, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume adjustment by operating the volume control means 39 may have the same configuration as the content described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (example: movable body error). Further, in these cases, the amount of light may be adjusted by the player. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the light emission pattern so that the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the error cannot be adjusted. Further, the light amount adjustment by the player may not be possible during the error notification.

Next, a case where a specific error 3 (example: RAM clear notification) occurs will be described (the explanation of the same part as in the case of the above-mentioned specific errors 1 and 2 is omitted, and the explanation of the different part is mainly performed. ). Further, the present embodiment may be applied to either or both of the notification at the time of RAM clear after the setting change processing and the notification at the time of RAM clear executed without performing the setting change processing. good.

The sub-control means performs the above-mentioned initial setting process when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Then, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear, the sound, the lamp, and the display means of the gaming machine are used to notify that the RAM has been cleared. At the same time, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed. At this time, the staging control means executes the same processing as the above-mentioned specific error 1 by using the ON of the error flag (the RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger. Further, the same process as the above-mentioned specific error 1 is executed by using the OFF of the error flag (the RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger.

(Pattern 1) During the RAM clear notification, the volume may be adjusted by the switch on the back side, and the volume may not be adjusted by the operation of the operating means on the front side. The volume adjustment bar may have the same contents as the above-mentioned specific error 1.

(Pattern 2) During the RAM clear notification, the volume can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140, and the volume can not be adjusted by the operation of the volume control means 39 at least until the initialization of the movable body is completed. May be good. Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may also be configured to be hidden until at least the initialization of the movable body is completed, and then displayable. The content related to non-display and the content related to displayable may be the same as the above-mentioned specific error 1.

(Pattern 3) During the RAM clear notification, the volume may be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume control means 39 may be operated. Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may also be configured to be displayable. The content related to displayability may be the same as the above-mentioned specific error 1.

Further, in these cases, the light amount may be adjusted by the player even during the RAM clear notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the light emission pattern so that the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the RAM clear notification cannot be adjusted. Further, the light amount adjustment by the player may not be possible during the RAM clear notification.

Next, the second embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, unlike the embodiments described so far, the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) is stored in the storage area (hard Vol) based on the predetermined information indicating that an error has occurred. Instead of storing in the total volume storage area), the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume. In the present embodiment, for example, when a specific error 1 (example: movable body error) occurs, the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) even during the error is stored in the storage area (total) for storing the total volume. Since it is stored in the volume storage area), for example, when the volume control means 39 is operated by the player, the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is changed. As a result, since the predetermined value of the storage area (total volume storage area) is changed, the player can freely change the output volume of the sound related to the error by the volume control means 39. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the volume adjustment by the volume control means 39 is disabled during the error. With such a configuration, even when the volume control means 39 is operated by the player, the value of the storage area (soft Vol) is not changed, and as a result, the storage area (total volume) is not changed. Since the value of the storage area) is not changed, the output volume of the voice related to the error cannot be changed by the volume control means 39.

Further, even if the volume control means 39 is operated by the player during the error notification, the actual output volume cannot be adjusted / changed, but the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed. You may do it. In this case, in response to the operation of the volume control means 39, a signal for updating the display content of the volume adjustment notification image PV is transmitted from the sub control means to the display means. As a result, the actual output volume cannot be adjusted / changed, but the display content of the volume adjustment notification image PV can be updated. Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may not be displayed during the error notification.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) even during an error is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) for storing the total volume, the volume adjustment knob 140 during error notification. When is operated, the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 and the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) become different values, so a new predetermined value is set in the storage area (hard Vol) and the storage area (soft). Set to Vol). As a result, a new predetermined value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). Therefore, by operating the volume adjustment knob 140 during the error notification, the error is related. The audio output volume can be adjusted / changed. Further, during the error notification, the output volume of the voice related to the error may not be adjusted / changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated.

Further, the light amount may be adjusted by the player even during the error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the light emission pattern so that the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the error cannot be adjusted. Further, the light amount adjustment by the player may not be possible during the error notification.

Next, a case where a specific error 2 (example: door opening error) occurs will be described (the explanation of the same part as in the case of the above-mentioned specific error 1 is omitted, and the explanation of the different part is mainly performed). When a door opening error occurs, the sound, lamp, and display means of the gaming machine are used to notify the error state, but the specific error 2 (example: door opening error) is an error due to sound. The notification ends at a predetermined timing, the error notification by the display means ends at the timing of the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed), and the error notification by the lamp ends at the timing of the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed). Is configured to end at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the end of.

(Pattern 1) The effect control means is configured so that the volume adjustment cannot be performed by the volume control means 39 triggered by the fact that the error flag indicating that an error has occurred is turned ON. Further, at a predetermined timing at which the error notification by sound ends, the volume can be adjusted by the volume control means 39 with the presence / absence of error sound output as a trigger.

In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means can be hidden until the predetermined timing at which the error notification by sound ends, and can be displayed at the predetermined timing at which the error notification by sound ends (when there is an adjustment operation by the player). May be displayed or intentionally displayed). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, or the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. In this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be used. It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, during the error notification, the output volume of the voice related to the error may not be adjusted / changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated. Further, the light amount may be adjusted by the player even during the error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the light emission pattern so that the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the error cannot be adjusted. Further, the light amount adjustment by the player may not be possible during the error notification.

(Pattern 2) The effect control means is configured so that the volume adjustment cannot be performed by the operation means on the front side with the error flag indicating that an error has been turned ON as a trigger.

Further, at a predetermined timing when the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is completed, the volume can be adjusted by the volume control means 39, triggered by the detection of the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed). It is configured to be.

In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means is hidden until the predetermined timing at which the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is completed, and the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is completed. It may be possible to display at a predetermined timing (display is performed or intentionally displayed when there is an adjustment operation by the player). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, or the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. In this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be used. It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, during the error notification, the output volume of the voice related to the error may not be adjusted / changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated. Further, the light amount may be adjusted by the player even during the error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the light emission pattern so that the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the error cannot be adjusted. Further, the light amount adjustment by the player may not be possible during the error notification.

(Pattern 3) In the effect control means, the error flag is turned off at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event (here, the door is closed) that is the target of the error is completed in the error notification by the lamp. Is configured to make it impossible to adjust the volume by the volume control means. Further, the error notification by the lamp is a volume control means triggered by the error flag being turned off at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is completed. It is configured so that the volume can be adjusted by 39.

Further, in the error notification by the lamp, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means is hidden from the end of the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) to a predetermined timing (30 seconds later), and the lamp is used. The error notification can be displayed at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event subject to the error (here, the door is closed) is completed (displayed or intentionally when there is an adjustment operation by the player). It may be displayed). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, or the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. In this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be used. It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, during the error notification, the output volume of the voice related to the error may not be adjusted / changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated. Further, the light amount may be adjusted by the player even during the error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the light emission pattern so that the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the error cannot be adjusted. Further, the light amount adjustment by the player may not be possible during the error notification.

Next, a case where a specific error 3 (example: RAM clear notification) occurs will be described (the explanation of the same part as in the case of the above-mentioned specific errors 1 and 2 is omitted, and the explanation of the different part is mainly performed. ). Further, the present embodiment may be applied to either or both of the notification at the time of RAM clear after the setting change processing and the notification at the time of RAM clear executed without performing the setting change processing. good.

The sub-control means performs the above-mentioned initial setting process when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Then, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear, the sound, the lamp, and the display means of the gaming machine are used to notify that the RAM has been cleared. At the same time, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed.

(Pattern 1) The effect control means is configured so that the volume adjustment cannot be performed by the volume control means 39 with the ON of the error flag (the RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger.

Further, the volume can be adjusted by the volume control means 39 by using the OFF of the error flag (the RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger. Further, during the RAM clear notification, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means is hidden and can be displayed at the timing when the RAM clear notification is completed (displayed or intentionally when there is an adjustment operation by the player). It may be displayed). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, or the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the operation of the player. In this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be used. It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, during the RAM clear notification, the output volume of the voice related to the error may not be adjusted / changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated. Further, the light amount may be adjusted by the player even during the RAM clear notification. However, although the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the light emission pattern so that the brightness of the light emission pattern according to the error cannot be adjusted. Further, the light amount adjustment by the player may not be possible during the error notification.

(Pattern 2) The configuration is the same as that of the above-mentioned pattern 1, and the volume adjustment notification image PV may have a different configuration. For example, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means can be displayed from non-display at the timing when the initialization operation of the movable body is completed while the RAM is cleared (displayed or intentionally when the player performs an adjustment operation). It may be displayed).

(Pattern 3) The configuration is the same as that of the above-mentioned pattern 1, and the volume adjustment notification image PV may have a different configuration. For example, at the timing when the RAM clear notification is started, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means can be displayed from non-display (displayed or intentionally displayed when there is an adjustment operation by the player). You may do so.

Next, a third embodiment will be described. During error notification, the maximum volume value for error output is set in the storage area (total volume storage area) that stores the total volume used to determine the final output sound, and the primary volume value described above is determined. The volume value corresponding to the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 may be set for the primary volume or the secondary volume for determining the secondary volume value. With such a configuration, the output volume of the error sound can be set to the output volume according to the position of the volume adjustment knob 140. Further, as described above, when the volume is adjusted by the operation by the volume control means 39, the value of the storage area (soft Vol) is updated, and the updated value is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). It will be remembered. This allows the player to adjust the volume by operating the volume control means 34, but in the case of this embodiment, the total used to determine the final output sound during the error notification. Since it was decided to set the maximum volume value for error output in the storage area for storing the volume (total volume storage area), the volume was adjusted by the operation by the volume control means 34 during the error notification. However, the value of the storage area (total volume storage area) is not updated, and it is possible to prevent the player from lowering the output volume during the error notification. Further, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated, the volume value corresponding to the position is set as the secondary volume value in the secondary volume, so that the hall side can adjust the output volume during error notification. ing. In addition, the sound related to the game is emitted at the output volume calculated by the primary volume value for the game, the secondary volume value for the game, and the total volume value, and the sound related to the error is the primary volume value for the error and the secondary volume value for the error. It was decided that the output volume would be calculated based on the volume value and the total volume value, but during the error notification in this embodiment, the mute value (0) or the mute value (0) is added to the game primary volume value and the game secondary volume value. It is desirable to set the low tone value (10) and set the volume value according to the volume adjustment knob 140 as the error primary volume value and the error secondary volume value. As a result, the error sound is not obstructed by the game sound, so that the error sound can be made more prominent.

In the above-described embodiment, the volume of the voice related to the error notification cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control means 34 during the error notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can use the volume of the voice related to the error notification. It may be configured to be adjustable. In this case, the volume can be adjusted in multiple stages, but the sound related to the error sound may not be muted.

Further, regarding the voice during error notification, the range in which the volume can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the range in which the volume can be adjusted by the operation of the volume control means 39 may be different. In that case, the range in which the volume can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140 may be made larger than the range in which the volume can be adjusted by the operation of the volume control means 39, but vice versa. Further, in the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140, the voice during the error notification may be muted. In that case, the voice during the error notification may not be muted depending on the operation of the volume control means 39.

Further, the volume can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140 depending on the type of error, the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume control means 39, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume control means 39 depending on the type of error. It may be configured to set the one whose volume can be adjusted. For example, launch position notification that notifies the launch position of the game ball, launch position warning notification that warns the exact launch position when the game ball is launched in a direction that is not the proper launch position, and game. In the case of an error notification in which the player himself is involved in the occurrence / cancellation of an error, such as a plate portion full tank notification that notifies that the game ball payout operation cannot be executed because the plate portion that stores the balls is full. May be configured so that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume control means 39. Further, the volume may be adjusted by operating the volume adjusting knob 140 and the volume operating means 39 depending on the type of error.

In addition, in the case of error notification in which the player himself is not involved in the occurrence / cancellation of the error, such as when the payout operation cannot be performed normally or when the movable body cannot be operated normally, the volume adjustment knob 140 The volume may be adjusted by the method. Further, the volume may be adjusted by operating the volume adjusting knob 140 and the volume operating means 39.

Further, in the case of an error such as a door opening, a magnetic sensor error, a vibration sensor error, or a radio wave sensor error, in which a goto action is suspected, the volume may be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140. Further, the volume adjustment may be disabled.

Further, for predetermined notifications performed when the power is turned on, such as RAM clear notification, setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, backup recovery notification, etc., the volume may be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140. Further, the volume may be adjusted by operating the volume adjusting knob 140 and the volume operating means 39, or the volume may not be adjusted.

In the case of a gaming machine that displays a demo screen when the non-game state continues for a predetermined time, if the volume is adjusted by operating the volume control means 39 in the non-game state, until the demo screen display is started. It may be configured to clear the count for a predetermined time. Further, in this case, when the volume is adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 99, the count for a predetermined time until the demo screen is displayed may not be cleared.

Although each of the above-described embodiments has been described as separate embodiments for the sake of clarity, the respective embodiments may be combined. Further, all the contents of different embodiments may be combined, or one part of each embodiment may be extracted and combined with another embodiment.

In the embodiment, an example is shown in which the upper limit value information is different for each set value and the lower limit value information is common for the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information that define the range of the jackpot judgment random number, but the lower limit is shown for each set value. The value information may be different and the upper limit value information may be common, or both the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information may be different for each set value.

Further, the present invention can be similarly implemented in various ball game machines such as arrange ball machines and sparrow ball game machines, as well as in game machines other than ball game machines such as slot machines.

18 Lower speaker (audio output means)
25 Upper speaker (audio output means)
93 First special symbol display means (design display means)
94 Second special symbol display means (design display means)

Claims (1)

Equipped with a symbol display means that can display the symbol in a variable manner
In a gaming machine capable of performing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop symbol after the change by the symbol display means becomes a specific mode.
It is possible to execute a specific notice while displaying the fluctuation of the symbol.
The specific notice includes a first half section that does not yet suggest the possibility of the specific mode, and a second half section that suggests the possibility of the specific mode after the first half section.
When executing the specific notice, a voice output means capable of outputting a voice related to the specific notice and a voice output means.
It has a vibration sound generating means capable of generating a vibration sound by vibrating a predetermined portion when executing the specific notice.
A volume setting means capable of setting the volume by the voice output means between the maximum volume and the minimum volume is provided.
The audio output means is
When executing the first half section, the voice related to the specific notice is output at the first volume.
When executing the latter half section, the voice related to the specific notice is output at a second volume higher than the first volume.
After the execution of the first half section and before the execution of the second half section, the voice related to the specific notice is output at a third volume smaller than the first volume.
The vibration sound generating means generates the vibration sound in parallel with the voice when the voice relating to the specific notice is output at the second volume .
The voice regarding the specific notice is
When the maximum volume is set, it is easy to hear the vibration sound, and it is easy to hear.
When it is set to the minimum volume, it is configured to be difficult to hear for the vibration sound.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images